Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 375

User Manual

CityLink
B4008 Rev. M

Section I

Equipment Description

Section II

ODU Type I Installation

Section III

ODU Type II Installation

Section IV

ODU Type III Installation

Section V

IDU Installation

Section VI

Preparations for Operation

Section VII

Configuration with NEW-NMS

Section VIII :

Fast Ethernet Configuration

Section IX

Troubleshooting

Section X

Appendices

Nera Networks AS

CityLink
This section applies only to CE marked equipment

0889
WARNING:
Use of this equipment requires a separate
license to be applied for by the operator.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (INFORMAL)


English
Finnish
Dutch

French

Swedish
Danish
German

Hereby, Nera Networks AS, declares that this CityLink is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Nera Networks AS vakuuttaa tten ett CityLink tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY
oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Hierbij verklaart Nera Networks AS dat het toestel CityLink in overeenstemming is met
de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG
Bij deze verklaart Nera Networks AS dat deze CityLink voldoet aan de essentile eisen
en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC.
Par la prsente Nera Networks AS dclare que lappareil CityLink est conforme aux
exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Par la prsente, Nera Networks AS dclare que ce CityLink est conforme aux exigences
essentielles et aux autres dispositions de la directive 1999/5/CE qui lui sont applicables.
Hrmed intygar Nera Networks AS att denna CityLink str I verensstmmelse med de
vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv
1999/5/EG.
Undertegnede Nera Networks AS erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr CityLink overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF
Hiermit erklrt Nera Networks AS, dass sich dieser CityLink in bereinstimmung mit
den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. (BMWi)
Hiermit erklrt Nera Networks AS die bereinstimmung des Gertes CityLink mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie
1999/5/EG. (Wien)

Refer to Declaration of Conformity for further details.

B4008 Rev. M

CityLink

B4008 Rev. M

CityLink

B4008 Rev. M

CityLink

B4008 Rev. M

CityLink

B4008 Rev. M

CityLink

WARNING!

WARNING!

DO NOT remove or insert the


Transmitter Unit with DC power on.

This equipment contains components which are


sensitive to "ESD" (Electro Static Discharge).

Power to the OutDoor Unit (ODU) is carried on


the coaxial cable between the InDoor Unit
(IDU) and the ODU. Before connecting or
removing the cable, ensure that the primary
power to the IDU has been switched off.

It is therefore essential that whenever disassembling the equipment and/or handling PC boards,
special precautions to avoid ESD have to be
made.

CAUTION!
Exposure to strong high frequency electromagnetic fields may cause thermal damage to
personnel. The eye (Cornea and lens) is easily
exposed.

These precautions include personnel grounding,


grounding of work bench, grounding of tools and
instruments as well as transport and storage in
special antistatic bags and boxes.

CAUTION!

Any unnecessary exposure is undesirable and


should be avoided.
In Radio-Relay communication installations,
orderly setup for normal operation, the general
RF radiation level will be well below the safety
limit.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

In the antennas and directly in front of them the


RF intensity normally will exceed the danger
level, within limited portions of space.

IEC825-2: 1993

Dangerous radiation may be found in the


neighbourhood of open waveguide flanges or
horns where the power is radiated into space.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified


herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.

To avoid dangerous radiation the following


precautions must be taken:

The Optical Interface must only be serviced by


qualified personnel, who are aware of the
hazards involved to repair Laser products.

During work within and close to the front


of the antenna; make sure that transmitters
will remain turned off.
Before opening coaxial - or waveguide
connectors carrying RF power, turn off
transmitters.
Consider any incidentally open RF
connector as carrying power, until
otherwise proved. Do not look into coaxial
connectors at closer than reading distance
(30 cm). Do not look into an open waveguide unless you are absolutely sure that
the power is turned off.

B4008 Rev. M

When handling Laser products the following


precautions must be taken:
Never look directly into an open connector
or optical cable
Before disconnecting an optical cable, the
power should be switched off. If this is not
possible, the cable must be disconnected
from the STM-1 output before it is disconnected from the STM-1 input.
When the cable is reconnected it must be
connected to the STM-1 input before it is
connected to the STM-1 output.

CityLink

List of Revisions

Rev.

Date

What is changed

C
D
E

01-10-05
01-12-18
02-02-28

02-05-07

02-09-18

02-10-07

I
J

02-12-19

03-05-23

03-11-25

ODU Type II Installation introduced


ODU Type III Installation introduced
Section II; 13 & 15GHz ODU included.
Section IV; Additional info on installation added.
Section VII Chapter 5.2 Switch Criteria changed.
Section IX: Additional info about connectors and interfaces
in Appendix 1
Fast Ethernet introduced
Section VII; New subchapter 5.1.5 Reconfiguring a 1+0
IDU for use in Hot StandBy Configuration
21x2Mbit/s (CityLink ADM) introduced.
Section VIII: Updated bitmaps in Ch. 16.6 and 16.8.
Frequency tuning of 13GHz Transceiver included (Section II
Chapter 5.0).
Not used
Section V: New chapter 4.0 Installation of 21x2Mbit/s
Tributary Unit
Section II: Chapter 5.0; new frequency (Table II-5)
Installation of ODU Type I on Type III suspension introduced
Section IV: New subchapter: Mounting the transceiver
(without antenna) to a column.
Section VIII: Changed bitmaps in Ch. 16.1, 16.2, 16.6 and
16.8, Changes in Ch. 8.9.1 and 8.9.2. New commands
included in Ch. 3.0 and 4.0.
Section X: New alarms in Alarm list
DMD IDU introduced. ADM STM-1 and DS3/E3 ext.boards
introduced . New optical interfaces (2NYD5392A and
2NYD5368A) introduced.

04-10-26

New Version of NEW. (Section VII and VIII)


Added info about System Configuration (Section I)
Added info about IP Routing (Section VII)
Section X: Improved description of Power Connector

B4008 Rev. M

CityLink

Table of Contents
SECTION I Equipment Description .................. 21
1.0

Introduction ................................................................. 22

2.0

IDU ................................................................................
2.1 IDU Description ...................................................
2.2 Hot Standby IDU Description...............................
2.3 Line Interface Boards ..........................................
2.4 Service Telephone ..............................................
2.5 21x2Mbit/s Extension Board (option) ...................
2.6 ADM STM-1 (X-Connect) Extension Board (option)
2.6 3xDS3/E3 and DS1 Extension Board (option) ....
2.6 Ethernet Extension Board (CityLink Fast Ethernet)

24
24
26
28
28
30
30
32
33

3.0

ODU ..............................................................................
3.1 ODU Type I Description ......................................
3.2 ODU Type II Description .....................................
3.3 ODU Type III Description .....................................

34
34
36
38

4.0

Management ................................................................ 40

5.0

System Configurations ...............................................


5.1 1+0Configuration .................................................
5.2 Hot Standby Configuration ..................................
5.3 1+1 Frequency Diversity .....................................
5.4 Hot Standby Configuration Dual Antenna .........
5.5 Hot Standby Configuration Dual Baseband ......
5.6 2+0 Configuration ................................................
5.7 Space Diversity ...................................................
5.8 Hybrid Space Diversity ........................................
5.9 Radio Terminal Configurations ............................
5.10 Radio Repeater Configurations ...........................
5.11 Radio Channel Identification ................................

B4008 Rev. M

40
41
42
42
43
44
45
46
46
48
48
48

CityLink

SECTION II Installation of
ODU Type I and Antenna ................. 49
1.0

General ........................................................................
1.1 Packing ...............................................................
1.2 Marking ................................................................
1.3 Transportation .....................................................
1.4 Radio Equipment Inventory Check ......................
1.5 Preparation for Installation ...................................
1.6 Handling & Storage .............................................

50
50
50
50
51
51
51

2.0

Installation Equipment required ................................


2.1 Tools ...................................................................
2.1.1 Tools for Antenna Installation ..............................
2.1.2 Tools for IDU- ODU Cable /Connector Mounting.
2.2 Equipment external to the Radio Equipment .......

52
52
52
52
53

3.0

ODU / Antenna Installation, 1+0 Equipment .............


3.1 Installation of 0.6m and 0.45m Antenna .............
3.1.1 Preparing the Suspension for ODU Mounting .....
3.1.2 Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension ............
3.1.3 Mounting the Branching Support Bracket ............
3.1.4 Mounting the Rear Travers ..................................
3.1.5 Mounting the Suspension Support Bracket .........
3.1.6 Mounting the Bend on the Branching Unit ...........
3.1.7 Installation of the Branching Unit ........................
3.1.8 Attachment of the Sunshield Support ..................
3.1.9 Installation of the Flexible Waveguide ................
3.1.10 Installation of the Sunshield ................................
3.1.11 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to
a Column or a Wall ............................................
3.1.12 Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly .....
3.1.13 Pole Mount .........................................................
3.2 Installation of 1.2m Antenna ...............................
3.2.1 Assembly of Branching Support Bracket ............
3.2.3 Installation of Branching Unit,
Sun-shield and Flexible Waveguide ....................

54
54
54
55
56
57
57
58
59
59
60
61

4.0
10

62
65
67
68
68
69

ODU / Antenna Installation,


Hot Standby Equipment and 2+0 Equipment ........... 70
B4008 Rev. M

CityLink
4.1
4.1.1

0.45m and 0.6m Antenna ................................


Installation of Hot Standby (HSB) and 2+0
Dual Frequency Single Polarization Equipment .
4.1.1.1 Preparing the Suspension for ODU Mounting
and Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension .
4.1.1.2 Mounting the Branching Support Bracket ........
4.1.1.3 Mounting the Rear Travers, Mounting the
Suspension Support Bracket and Mounting
the Feed on the Branching Unit .......................
4.1.1.4 Installation of the HSB Branching Unit .............
4.1.1.5 Installation of the Flexible Waveguide .............
4.1.1.6 Installation of the Sunshield Support Bracket ..
4.1.1.7 Installation of the Sunshield.............................
4.1.1.8 Mounting the Suspension/ODU to a
Column or a Wall ............................................
4.1.1.9 Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly ..
4.1.1.10 Pole Mount ......................................................
4.1.2
Installation of 2+0 Equipment
(Single Frequency Dual polarity) .....................
4.1.2.1 Preparing the Suspension for ODU Mounting
and Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension .
4.1.2.2 Mounting the Branching Support Bracket, the
Rear Travers, the Suspension Support Bracket
and the Feed on the Branching Units ................
4.1.2.3 Installation of the Branching Units ...................
4.1.2.4 Installation of the Flexible Waveguide .............
4.1.2.5 Installation of the Sunshield.............................
4.1.2.6 Mounting the Suspension/ODU to a
Column or a Wall ............................................
4.1.2.7 Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly ..
4.1.2.9 Pole Mount ......................................................
4.2
1.2m Antenna ..................................................
4.2.1
Assembly of Branching Support Bracket ........
4.2.2
Installation of Branching Unit, Sun-shield and
Flexible Waveguide .........................................
4.2.2.1 Hot Standby and
2+0 Dual Frequency Single Polarization .........
4.2.2.2 2+0 Single Frequency Dual Polarization .........

B4008 Rev. M

70
70
70
70
71
71
72
73
73
74
74
75
76
76
76
76
77
78
79
79
80
81
81
82
82
83

11

CityLink
5.0

Frequency Tuning at 13GHz &15GHz Transceiver ... 84

6.0

Cable Connections ..................................................... 90

7.0

Antenna Alignment ...................................................... 90

SECTION III Installation of


ODU Type II and Antenna .................. 91
1.0

General ........................................................................
1.1 Packing ...............................................................
1.2 Marking ................................................................
1.3 Transportation .....................................................
1.4 Radio Equipment Inventory Check ......................
1.5 Preparation for Installation ...................................
1.6 Handling & Storage .............................................

92
92
92
92
93
93
93

2.0

Installation Equipment required ................................


2.1 Tools ...................................................................
2.1.1 Tools for Antenna Installation ..............................
2.1.2 Tools for IDU- ODU Cable /Connector Mounting.
2.2 Equipment external to the Radio Equipment .......

94
94
94
94
95

3.0

ODU Installation .......................................................... 96


3.1 Mounting the ODU to the Pole ............................. 96
3.2 Cable Connections.............................................. 97

4.0

Antenna and Waveguide Installation ........................


4.1 0.6m Antenna ......................................................
4.2 1.2m Antenna ......................................................
4.3 2m Antenna .........................................................
4.4 2.4m ....................................................................
4.5 3m .......................................................................

12

98
98
99
100
101
102

B4008 Rev. M

CityLink

SECTION IV Installation of
ODU Type III and Antenna ............ 103
1.0

General ........................................................................
1.1 Packing ...............................................................
1.2 Marking ................................................................
1.3 Transportation .....................................................
1.4 Radio Equipment Inventory Check ......................
1.5 Preparation for Installation ...................................
1.6 Handling & Storage .............................................

104
104
104
104
105
105
105

2.0

Installation Equipment required ................................


2.1 Tools ...................................................................
2.1.1 Tools for Antenna Installation and Adjustment ....
2.1.2 Tools for IDU- ODU Cable /Connector Mounting.
2.2 Equipment external to the Radio Equipment .......

106
106
106
106
107

3.0

ODU / Antenna Installation, 1+0 Equipment .............


3.1 Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension ............
3.2 Mounting the Sunshield .......................................
3.3 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to
a Column by using the U-bolts ............................
3.4 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to
a Column by using the Clamps ...........................
3.5 Mounting the Transceiver
(without Antenna) to a Column ............................
3.6 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Wall .......
3.7 Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly ......

108
108
109

ODU / Antenna Installation, HSB and 2+0 Equipment


4.1 Preparing the Suspension ...................................
4.2 Mounting the Antenna to the Supension ..............
4.3 Mounting the Hybrid Frame to the Antenna .........
4.3 Mounting the CityLink III ODUs to
the Antenna Assembly ........................................
4.4 Mounting the Transceiver
(without Antenna) to the Column .........................
4.5 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Wall .......

121
121
122
123

4.0

B4008 Rev. M

110
111
112
117
118

125
126
126
13

CityLink
5.0

Cable Connections ..................................................... 127

6.0

Antenna Alignment ......................................................


6.1 Azimuth and Elevation Adjustment ......................
6.2 Coarse adjustment..............................................
6.3 Fine adjustment ..................................................
6.4 Final Control ........................................................
6.5 Polarisation alignment .........................................

128
128
128
128
129
129

SECTION V IDU Installation............................... 131


1.0

General ........................................................................
1.1 Packing ...............................................................
1.2 Marking ................................................................
1.3 Transportation .....................................................
1.4 Radio Equipment Inventory Check ......................
1.5 Preparation for Installation ...................................
1.6 Handling & Storage .............................................

132
132
132
132
133
133
133

2.0

IDU Installation ............................................................ 134


2.1. Mounting the IDU in an ANSI (19") or an ETSI Rack ... 134
2.2 Cable Installation ................................................. 135

3.0

Hot Standby IDU Installation ...................................... 136


3.1 Mounting the Hot Standby IDUs in a Rack ........... 136
3.2 Interconnections in a Hot Standby System ......... 137

4.0

Installation of Optional Extension Boards ............... 138

5.0

IDU/ODU Cable Installation........................................ 141

6.0

Change of Fan-Cassette ............................................ 146

SECTION VI Preparations for Operation ........ 147


1.0
14

General ........................................................................ 148


B4008 Rev. M

CityLink
1.1
1.2
2.0

Equipment required ............................................. 148


Connections ........................................................ 148

Power on ......................................................................
2.1 NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator Startup and
connecting to Network Elements ........................
2.1.1 Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with
Serial Connection (RS-232/ LCT). ......................
2.1.2 Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with
TCP/IP Connection. ............................................
2.2 Initial configuration ...............................................

148
149
149
150
150

SECTION VII Configuration by NEW Configurator 151


1.0

General ........................................................................ 152

2.0

Element Node ..............................................................


2.1 Element Id ...........................................................
2.2 Available Functions .............................................
2.3 Notifications .........................................................
2.4 NE Clock Page ....................................................
2.5 Software Download .............................................
2.6 Software Versions ...............................................

154
154
156
157
159
160
161

3.0

Transmission Node .....................................................


3.1 Section Termination ............................................
3.1.1 Section Termination, SW-version < R2A00 ........
3.1.2 Section Termination, SW-version R2A00 .........
3.1.3 SSM - Synchronization Status Message .............
3.2 Alarm Indication Signal Insert ..............................
3.3 Path Trace ..........................................................

163
163
163
164
172
173
176

4.0

Equipment Node .........................................................


4.1 Network Routing ..................................................
4.2 IP Routing............................................................
4.2.1 General Settings .................................................
4.2.2 Active Routes ......................................................

178
178
181
182
184

B4008 Rev. M

15

CityLink
4.2.3 Static Routes ......................................................
4.2.4 RIP Interfaces .....................................................
4.2.5 OSPF Interfaces .................................................
4.2.6 OSPF Areas ........................................................
4.3 Communication Ports .........................................
4.3.1 DCC (Data Communication Channel) ................
4.3.2 NI (Network Interface) ..........................................
4.3.3 LCT .....................................................................
4.3.4 Ethernet ..............................................................
4.3.5 IP Settings ...........................................................
4.3.6 IP Tunneling ........................................................
4.3.7 OSI TP4 Tunneling ..............................................
4.4 Looping ...............................................................
4.4.1 Main Looping .......................................................
4.4.2 64 Kbit/s Looping ................................................
4.4.3 2 Mbit/s Wayside Looping ...................................
4.4.4 21x2Mbit/s Looping..............................................
4.4.5 DS3/E3 Looping ..................................................
4.5 In Door Unit (IDU) ................................................
4.5.1 IDU Production Data ...........................................
4.5.2 64 kbit/s Channels ..............................................
4.5.3 2 Mbit/s Wayside Channel ..................................
4.5.4 SOH X-Connect ..................................................
4.5.5 Error Pulse Output ..............................................
4.5.6 Auxiliary Output Configuration .............................
4.5.7 Diagnose .............................................................
4.5.8 Self Test ..............................................................
4.5.9 BER Thresholds .................................................
4.5.10 OSI Configuration ................................................
4.5.11 Laser Control ......................................................
4.5.12 IDU Replace Unit Wizard ....................................
4.6 Out Door Unit (ODU) ...........................................
4.6.1 Type I ODU .........................................................
4.6.2 Type II ODU .........................................................
4.6.3 Type III ODU ........................................................
4.6.4 Antenna Data ......................................................
4.6.5 ODU Replace Unit Wizard ..................................
5.0
16

185
186
187
188
189
189
191
193
194
195
196
197
198
198
200
202
205
207
210
210
211
213
215
216
217
219
220
220
222
227
229
230
230
235
247
252
253

CityLink ADM ............................................................... 254


B4008 Rev. M

CityLink
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
6.0

21x2 Mbit/s Extension Board ...............................


Drop or Continue .................................................
PRBS Test - Check ............................................
PRBS Test - Generators .....................................
Production Data - 21x2Mbit/s Extension board ...
DS3/E3 Extension Board ....................................
DS3/E3 Configuration .........................................
DS3/E3 Frame Structure Configuration ..............
ADM STM-1 Extension Board (X-Connect) .........
X-Connect Frame Structure Configuration ..........
X-Connect Configuration .....................................

254
254
258
260
262
263
263
265
267
267
268

Hot Standby .................................................................


6.1 General ...............................................................
6.1.1 Functionality ........................................................
6.1.2 Element ID ..........................................................
6.1.2 Looping Configuration .........................................
6.1.3 Hot Standby Configuration ..................................
6.1.4 Hot Standby Switching Criteria ............................
6.1.4 Reconfiguring a Hot Standby IDU for
use in 1+0 Configuration .....................................
6.1.5 Reconfiguring a 1+0 IDU for
use in Hot StandBy Configuration ......................

270
270
270
271
273
275
276
278
278

SECTION VIII CityLink Fast Ethernet Configuration 279


Hyperterminal & Telnet .................................................... 280
1.0

Hyperterminal & Telnet Commands .......................... 280

2.0

How to get this link alive ............................................ 281


2.1 How to get this link alive, parameters .................. 281
2.2 Testing ................................................................ 281

3.0

Top Level Commands ................................................ 282


3.1 Top Level Commands, Example ......................... 283

B4008 Rev. M

17

CityLink
4.0

Submenu Commands ..................................................


4.1 EEB Submenu ....................................................
4.2 Baseband Submenu ...........................................
4.3 Modem Submenu (part of IDU) ...........................
4.4 Radio Submenu (part of ODU) ............................
4.4.1 Radio Status, Example .......................................
4.4.2 Radio Commands, Example of Error Message ..
4.5 SU Submenu (part of IDU) ..................................
4.6 Security Submenu ..............................................
4.7 Performance Submenu .......................................
4.8 Configuration Submenu ......................................
4.8.1 Management Settings .........................................
4.9 Test & Fault Submenu ........................................
4.10 Q1module Submenu ...........................................

284
284
285
286
287
288
288
289
289
290
290
291
291
292

5.0

Software Upgrade Procedure for


the CityLink Fast Ethernet Device ............................
5.1 How to download a file to the IDU: .......................
5.1.1 Using the Console FTP Client .............................
5.1.2 Using the Internet Explorer ..................................
5.2 How to download a file to the ODU .....................

293
294
294
295
296

NEW Network Management System ............................... 297


6.0

Start NEW-NMS & Connect........................................ 297

7.0

Network Element Configuration ................................ 300

8.0

Element Node ..............................................................


8.1 Element Id ...........................................................
8.2 NE Clock .............................................................
8.3 Software Versions ...............................................
8.4 Production Data ..................................................
8.5 SNMP Agent(s) Settings .....................................
8.6 Trap Table ...........................................................
8.7 MIB II - System Group .........................................
8.8 MIB-II SNMP Group..............................................
8.9 Looping ...............................................................
8.9.1 Main Traffic Loops ...............................................

18

302
302
303
304
305
306
308
309
311
312
313
B4008 Rev. M

CityLink
8.9.2 Wayside Loops ................................................... 315
8.9.3 64 kbit/s Loops .................................................... 316
9.0

In Door Unit (IDU) .......................................................


9.1 64 kbit/s Channels ..............................................
9.2 Ethernet Extension Board ...................................
9.2.1 Ethernet Ports .....................................................
9.2.2 2 Mbit/s Ports ......................................................
9.3 Wayside Channel ................................................
9.4 Auxiliary Output ...................................................
9.5 BER Thresholds .................................................
9.6 Laser Control ......................................................

317
317
317
318
319
320
321
323
325

10.0

Out Door Unit (ODU) ..................................................


10.1 Antenna Data ......................................................
10.2 Power Settings ....................................................
10.3 Frequency Settings .............................................

327
327
328
330

11.0

Performance ................................................................
11.1 G826 Performance..............................................
11.2 Port Performance ...............................................
11.3 Repeater Performance .......................................

332
332
334
335

12.0

Fault .............................................................................. 336


12.1 NE Alarm Log ...................................................... 336

13.0

Security ........................................................................ 337


13.1 Security Log ........................................................ 337

SNMP & MIB Description ................................................. 338


14.0

General ........................................................................ 338

15.0

Supported MIBs ......................................................... 338

16.0

MIB Overview ............................................................. 339


16.1 Unit ...................................................................... 340
16.2 IDU ...................................................................... 341

B4008 Rev. M

19

CityLink
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
16.8

ODU ....................................................................
Test Manager ......................................................
Performance Manager ........................................
Fault Manager .....................................................
Analogue Value ...................................................
Security Manager ................................................

SECTION IX

342
343
344
345
346
346

Troubleshooting ......................... 347

1.0

General ........................................................................ 348

2.0

Description of Alarm LEDs .........................................


2.1 IDU Alarm LEDs ..................................................
2.2 HSB-IDU Alarm LEDs and Switch Indicators .....
2.3 LEDs on Line Interface Plug-in Boards ...............

348
348
348
349

3.0

Troubleshooting by NEW-NMS Configurator ..........


3.1 Introduction ..........................................................
3.2 Information Acquisition ........................................
3.2.1 Polling .................................................................
3.2.2 Event Notification ................................................
3.3 Alarm Presentation..............................................
3.4 Visual Alarm Notification ......................................
3.4.1 Alarms on a Tree node/leaf in the Explorer view .
3.4.2 Alarms on a Node symbol in the Map view ..........
3.4.3 Viewing Alarms in the Current Alarms View ........

349
349
349
349
350
350
351
351
352
353

SECTION X Appendices................................... 355


Appendix I: IDU / HSB-IDU Interface Description .................. 356
Appendix II: ODU Interface Description ................................. 370
Appendix III: Alarm List & Alarm Description .......................... 371

20

B4008 Rev. M

Equipment Description

SECTION I
Equipment
Description

B4008 Rev. M

21

CityLink

1.0

Introduction
CityLink is a super compact SDH radio-relay transmission system with STM1 capacity. The equipment is split mounted with one single coaxial cable
between the InDoor Unit (IDU) and the OutDoor Unit (ODU). The ODU and
antenna can be located up to 300 meter apart from the IDU. The equipment
is available in 1+0 (single), 2+0 or 1+1 hot standby configurations. Various
line and tributary interface options are available as plug-in modules. The
equipment is also prepared for 21x2Mbit/s terminal multiplexer functionality.
The network applications foreseen for this equipment are mainly for increased connectivity in urban area as well as closure of fiber optic rings.
Additionally, in the fixed part of mobile networks, this equipment is
suitable.
Built-in supervision enables easy installation and configuration, and system status and availability data may be recorded. Advanced management
with standardized use of the Embedded Control Channel (ECC) allows for
easy access to this equipment. Broadband RF design enables easy channel
selection.

22

B4008 Rev. M

Equipment Description
Key features
Easy installation
Frequency agility
155 Mb/s Line interface plug-ins available:
Unbalanced 75 coaxial
Balanced, Category 5 UTP, 100
Single Mode fiber optic
Multi Mode fiber optic
SW managed configuration of 32, 64 and 128 TCM modulation
SW managed configuration of STM-0 or STM-1 capacity
21x2Mbits/s terminal multiplexer option
3xDS3/E3 and DS1 option
ADM STM-1 option (STM-1 cross-connect)
Fast ethernet radio option
64kbit/s and 2Mbit/s insert channels
Service Channel / Engineering Orderwire
Line extensions (2) for Service Channel
Built-in diagnostics with local and remote loopback
Available Configurations:
1+0 (Unprotected)
(STM-1 & STM-0)
1+1 (Hot Standby)
(STM-1 & STM-0)
2+0 Dual frequency, Single Polarisation (DF-SP) (2xSTM-1&STM-0)
2+0 Single frequency, Dual Polarisation (SF-DP) (2xSTM-1&STM-0)
High system gain
Automatic/Manual Transmitter Power Control (ATPC/MTPC)
Standardized use of the ECC
Embedded SNMP (Option)
14, 28, 50 & 55 (56) MHz channel arrangements
2MHz synchronization interfaces (SETS)
Interface for local and subnetwork management (LAN or RS-232)

B4008 Rev. M

23

CityLink

2.0
2.1

IDU
IDU Description
Figures X-1 shows the IDU front layout. All the connectors are located on
the front for easy operation. In addition to the line interface, 2Mbit/s
wayside and 64kbit/s data channels are available. As options, a 21x2 Mbit/
s terminal multiplexer, ADM STM-1 (X-Connect) or DS3/E3 can be configured by adding a second circuit board. The IDU is equipped with an
integrated supervisory system for local and remote configuration and
control. The supervisory system communicates with the ODU by use of an
FSK modulated channel on the coaxial cable. The same coaxial cable also
carries power to the ODU. For configuration and management purposes the
IDU is equipped with two LCT interfaces for connection to the PC, one with
RS-232 interface and one LAN TP interface. In addition NI interfaces for
connection to other IDUs or other Nera equipment are provided. A SETS
function is incorporated into the unit, conforming to ITU-T rec. G.823 with
balanced 120 interface. The IDU has a connector for alarm input/output
functionality (ALM/AUX). Alarm and warning LEDs are located on right
hand side of front. Located close to the power connector is a power indicating
LED.
Figure I-1 shows a block schematic view of the IDU with various optional line
interface plug-in boards and also a 21x2 Mbit/s Extension Board. In radio
transmit direction, the 155 Mb/s input signal from the line interface board is
fed to the SORP ASIC. It performs all the SOH processing and radio
scrambling. Then, the TX FPGA encodes the signal by use of a convolution
code and an optional Reed Solomom code. The signal is then mapped into
a 32TCM, 64TCM or 128TCM constellation, as required. It also
performs the necessary pulse shaping by use of a digital FIR-filter. The signal
is then digitally I-Q modulated, and the 350MHz IF signal is fed to the ODU
interface and applied to the IF coaxial connector. In receive direction the
140MHz IF from the ODU will interface the IDU on the same connector. The
necessary cable equalizing functions are provided in the ODU interface and
the equalized IF is presented to the coherent demodulator. From the demodulator the signal is fed to the RX FPGA, which perform slope equalization and
receive filtering. Then the ATDEC ASIC, performs Trellis decoding, by use
of soft decision and the Viterbi algorithm for error correction. The optional
Reed Solomon decoding is performed in the RX FPGA. The decoded signal
is then fed to the SORP ASIC for radio descrambling and SOH processing,
and is finally fed to the line interface board.

24

B4008 Rev. M

Figure I-1

B4008 Rev. M

File: IDU-HRQI.DSF

48V DC

2 x NI

FIFO BUS

LCT
LAN (10BASE-T)

ALARMS

2 x PHONE EXT.

PHONE

2 x 64 Kb/s

2Mb/s WAYSIDE

HSB IDU INTFC.

Optical MMF ~2Km


or Optical SMF ~15Km
or Optical SMF ~40Km
or Optical SMF ~80Km
or Electr. CAT5 UTP
or Electr. G.703

G.703

2MHz SYNC

21x2 Mb/s
G.703

21

FPGA

155 Mb/s
LINE
INTERFACE

"E1"

TRIBUTARY
INTERFACE
BLOCK
NO. 2

"H2"

MAIN BD.

ALM/AUX
INTFC.

INTERFACE

V11/G.703

DCC

SUPERVISORY
SYSTEM

SVCE
PHONE
INTERFACE

"SORP"
STM-1
OVERHEAD
AND
RADIO
PROCESSOR

ASIC

SYNC.
INTERFACE

TRIBUTARY
DATA
MAPPER
NO. 1

TRIBUTARY
DATA
MAPPER
NO. 1

ASIC's

21x2 Mb/s LINE INTFC./ADD-DROP EXTENSION BD.

TRELLIS
DECODER

"ATDEC"

ASIC

DC / DC

CARRIER REC.
CLOCK REC.
DEMAPPER
DECODER

FPGA
RX:

ENCODER
MAPPER
FILTER

FPGA
TX:

INTERFACE

REGULATED
OUTPUTS

ODU

87.5 MHz
OSC.
SOURCE

MODEM TRANSCEIVER COMMUNICATION

93.3 MHz
OSC.
SOURCE

2x

DOWNCONVERSION
A/D CONVERSION

INTERPOLATION
MODULATION
D/A CONVERSION
UPCONVERSION

4x
3x

ODU

Equipment Description

Block schematic view of the IDU

25

CityLink
2.2

Hot Standby IDU Description


Figure X-2 shows the HSB IDU front layout. The connectors on the front
are identical to the ones used on the IDU and is therefore not further
described here. Additionally, a second power connector is added for
power redundancy enabling separate battery courses. Figure I-2 shows a
block schematic view of the IDU with various optional line interface plugin boards. Interconnection of data and control signals between IDUs (A and
B) and HSB IDU is by means of a connector and special split cable. This
cable is part of the HSB cable kit. In a 1+1 HSB system, all the customer
interfaces are towards the HSB IDU. These signals are disabled on the IDU
in such a configuration. The same alarm and warning LEDs used on IDU is
also used here. Additionally, a second power indicating LED is located
close to the redundant power connector. Also, an array of four LEDs,
located on the right hand side in close proximity to the alarm/warning
LEDs, indicates switching status in transmit and receive direction.

26

B4008 Rev. M

Equipment Description
3xE3/DS3 EXTENSION BD.
ASIC's

TRIBUTARY
DATA
MAPPER
NO. 1

FPGA

TRIBUTARY
INTERFACE
BLOCK

3x34/45 Mb/s
G.703

TRIBUTARY
DATA
MAPPER
NO. 1

PHY

1.5 Mb/s WAYSIDE

"E1"

SYNC.

2MHz SYNC

INTERFACE

G.703
Optical MMF ~2Km
or Optical SMF ~15Km
or Optical SMF ~40Km
or Optical SMF ~80Km
or Electr. CAT5 UTP
or Electr. G.703

ASIC

155 Mb/s
LINE
INTERFACE

"H1"

"SORP"
SDH
OVERHEAD
AND
RADIO
PROCESSOR

IDU A INTFC. (R)


IDU B INTFC. (P)

DCC

2Mb/s WAYSIDE

V11/G.703

2 x 64 Kb/s

INTERFACE

SVCE
PHONE
INTERFACE

PHONE
2 x PHONE EXT.

ALM/AUX
INTFC.

ALARMS
LCT
LAN (10BASE-T)

SUPERVISORY
SYSTEM

FIFO BUS
2 x NI
48V DC

DC / DC

REGULATED
OUTPUTS

MAIN BD HSB IDU.


File: HSBIDU-HRQE.DRW

Figure I-2

B4008 Rev. M

Block schematic view of the HSB IDU


(shown here with DS3/E3 Extension Board)

27

CityLink
2.3

Line Interface Boards


Six different versions of 155 Mb/s line interface boards are presently
available as plug-in modules. These are:
Electrical, 75 unbalanced interface bd. according to
ITU-T rec. G.703.
CAT-5 UTP electrical interface bd. according to
ATM Forum rec. af-phy-0015.000.
Multimode Fiber optical interface bd. according to
ANSI rec. T1.646 and T1.105.06 type SR-0.
Singelmode Fiber optical interface bd. according to
ITU-T rec. G.957, type S-1.1.
Singelmode Fiber optical interface bd. according to
ITU-T rec. G.957, type L-1.1.
Singelmode Fiber optical interface bd. according to
ITU-T rec. G.957, type L-1.2.
In a 1+1 HSB system, the line interface board will only be used on the HSB
IDU. All the interface boards have an input signal indicating LED.

2.4

Service Telephone
A service telephone with collective call is provided in both the IDU and
HSB IDU. In a 1+1 HSB system, the customer interface connection must
be towards the HSB IDU.
External connection to two other similar equipment can take place via two
RJ-45 ports on the front. Refer to Appendix I for connector pin-out and
description and Figure I-3 for circuit diagram of the service channel
interface. The balanced interfaces have a nominal level of -6dBm and
600 impedance. Connect OUT to INP and vice versa.
Service channel signalling is based on collective call. The DTMF-star
sequence is used as collective call to interface with other Nera equipment.
If other equipment connected have a different calling system than DTMFstar, they may use CALL INP/CALL OUT. Station ground connected to
CALL INP will start transmission of DTMF-star as well as activating a
buzzer. A detected DTMF-star will activate the CALL OUT by opening an
optocoupler to station ground.
For Nera PDH-radio equipped with Service Board 2NF467A, CALL INP
has to be connected to CALL OUT and vice versa.

28

B4008 Rev. M

Equipment Description
A control signal can be transferred over the radio hop. Station ground
connected to CTRL INP will set a signalling bit which is detected on the
other side and activates CTRL OUT by opening an optocoupler to station
ground. See Figure I-3. The control signal is used to control PABXadapters and to switch off loudspeakers on Nera service boards with
selective call (e.g. 2NF4688, 2NF533B and 2KNF232A). The control
signal is transferred only if SOH-byte E1, E2 or F1 is used for
transmission of service channel.
For setup by NEW, refer to Section VII.

1k

BYM122

15

BSR19A

2
1

10k

CALLOUT/
CTRLOUT

BSR19A
CALLINP/
CTRLINP

BAS16

10k

+5V

3
PC3Q66Q

CALL_INP/
CTRL_INP

2
1

14

1k

10k

+3.3V

PC3Q66Q
2
2

CALL_OUT/
CTRL_OUT

16

13

-48V

Figure I-3 Service Channel CALL" Circuit Diagram

B4008 Rev. M

29

CityLink
2.5

21x2Mbit/s Extension Board (option)


In Figure I-4, a block schematic depiction of a 21x2Mbit/s Extension Board
function are given. This function enables twenty-one 2Mbit/s channels to
be multiplexed/demultiplexed, enabling a terminal multiplex function. It is
possible to configure the unit to drop a certain number of 2Mbit/s channels
while delivering the rest as a part of the STM-1 payload in a drop-andcontinue configuration. In a standard terminal multiplexer configuration,
the plug-in line interface board is omitted. The 2Mbit/s channels conform to
ITU-T rec. G.703, balanced 120. Also provided on the same circuit board
is the option of using one of the 2Mbit/s channels as SETS reference clock
input/output, according to ITU-T rec. G.823.
In a 1+1 HSB system, this interface board will be mounted in the HSB IDU.
In a 1+0 system it will be included in the IDU.
21x2 Mb/s LINE INTFC./ADD-DROP EXTENSION BD.
ASIC's

ASIC

1
21x2 Mb/s
G.703

21

TRIBUTARY
INTERFACE
BLOCK
NO. 1

TRIBUTARY
DATA
MAPPER
NO. 1

TRIBUTARY
DATA
MAPPER
NO. 1

To/from
the
IDU's
SDH
Overhead
and
Radio
Processor
(SORP)

Figure I-4 Block schematic view of the 21x2Mbit/s Extension Board

2.6

ADM STM-1 (X-Connect) Extension Board (option)


The Extension Bd. ADM STM-1, which is a part of the Indoor unit in the
NERA CityLink, is an optional ITU-T standard STM-1 interface implemented
for 155 Mbit/s signal entry and exit in a ring topology. The STM-1 entry signal
into the ring is split and transmitted to line and radio side in parallel. Signals
exiting the ring are received from line and radio side. These are up to 63xVC12s from either side and they are protected, i.e. they shall be switched
individually if a break somewhere in the ring occurs. Also, the system will
handle any allowed combination of VC-3s and VC-12s.
In Figure I-5, a block schematic of the STM-1 Extension Board functions is
shown. The STM-1Extension Board will interface one STM-1 line signal in
Tx- and Rx-direction. The STM-1 interface is interchangeable in the following

30

B4008 Rev. M

Equipment Description
way: In a slot in the STM-1Extension Board, a line interface board is inserted.
Presently one type of board is implemented: The plug-in board compliant
with ITU-T G.703 CMI encoded 155 Mbit/s customer interface; 2LN24C. A
green LED, located on the front of the board indicates presence of an input
signal. The line interface board is mounted on the extension board prior to
this being mounted within the IDU cabinet. This means that the line interface
board will not be used as a plug-in type board in this application.
SOH processing and line scrambling /descrambling on the STM-1 interface
are performed by the SORP ASIC. The TDM1 ASICs perform insertion,
extraction, signal processing and cross-connection of data in the payload
of the STM-1 frame and also make error and performance measurements on
VC-3 and error measurements on VC-12. The PLD14 FPGA makes performance measurements on VC-12s embedded in the STM-1 datastreams from
two TDM1 ASICs. The measurement results are used to choose individual
VC-12s from the two datastreams in TDM1 ASIC no.1 and TDM1 ASIC no.2.
The selection is done by the SU in TDM1 ASIC no. 3. See Figure I-5.

IDU CONN

TDM1 ASIC no 1
PLD14 FPGA
TDM1 ASIC no 3

TDM1
RADIO

PLD14
FPGA

TDM1
LINE

TDM1 ASIC no 2 -

TDM1
LINE
EXTENSION
BOARD

SORP ASIC no 2

SORP
EXT BOARD

Line Interface Board -

LINE
INTERFACE
CARD

Figure I-5 Block schematic view of the ADM STM-1 Extension Board
B4008 Rev. M

31

CityLink
2.6

3xDS3/E3 and DS1 Extension Board (option)


DS3 is a 45Mbit/s PDH standard used for the North American marked, E3 is
34Mb/s PDH standard used for the European marked and the DS1 is a
1.5Mbit/s PDH standard used for the North American marked. The 3xDS3/
E3 and DS1 Ext. Bd., which is a part of the Indoor unit in the NERA CityLink,
will perform add-drop of 3xDS3/E3 PDH channels to-from a STM-1 frame. In
additional it will perform insertion and extraction of 1.5 Mbit/s wayside (DS1/
T1).
In Figure I-6, a block schematic of the 3xDS3/E3 and DS1 Ext. Bd. functions
are shown. The 3xDS3/E3 and DS1 Ext. Bd. will interface three DS3/E3 and
one DS1 line signal in Tx- and Rx-direction. The line interface circuit includes;
cable equalizer, line coding and pulse shaping functions. This is performed
by two Line Interface Unites (LIU), one for DS3/E3 an one for DS1. SOH
overhead and radio processor is located oh the motherboard in the IDU.
The PLD15 FPGA maps the 3xDS3/E3 into three VC3s, then into a VC4 and
then into a STM-1 signal and de-maps in the opposite direction. The STM1 signal is locked to a 2.048 MHz input (SETS) coming from the motherboard.
The TDM1 ASIC performs insertion, extraction and cross-connection of
data in the payload of the STM-1 frame. Together, the two TDM1s and PLD15
implement the core of a DS3/E3 add-drop multiplexer. The 1.5 Mbit/s
Wayside (DS1/T1) function is implemented in PLD15 and is independent of
the TDM1 ASICs.
3xDS3/E3 and T1 EXT. BOARD
IDU CONNECTOR

TDM1
No. 1
LINE

48 V
DC/DC
PLD15

TDM1
No. 2
RADIO

+3.3 V
+1.5 V
T1 LIU

3xDS3/E3

Figure I-6 Block schematic view of the 3xDS3/E3 Extension Board


32

B4008 Rev. M

Equipment Description
2.6

Ethernet Extension Board (CityLink Fast Ethernet)


In Figure I-7, a block schematic description of an Ethernet Extension Board
(EEB) is given. This function enables 4 separate Ethernet channels 10BASET/100BASE-TX and 4 separate 2Mbit channels conforming to ITU-T rec.
G.703. The EEB will treat all 8 channels separately, meaning that all data
entering on one channel will leave on the same channel on the other side of
the radio hop. All channels are full duplex. The four Ethernet and four 2Mbit/
s channels shares the STM-1 data capacity. The 2Mbit channels, if enabled,
will always be guaranteed full bandwidth. The 4 Ethernet channels can be
configured to either equally share the STM-1 data frame, or one channel can
be given priority. The EEB has a limited on board Ethernet package buffer
capacity. This gives the ability to handle short time 100Mbit/s bursts on all
four channels without package loss. Also the EEB supports flow control,
making it possible to configure a 400Mbit full duplex network without
package loss, even though the radio hop is limited to STM-1 data rate.

4x RJ45
Ethernet

Ethernet
Interface

Ethernet to/from
STM1 and 2Mbit/s
mapper/demapper
Ethernet to/from
STM1 and 2Mbit
mapper/demapper

4x RJ45
2Mbit

To from IDU
main board

22/1.5Mbit
Mbit/s
Interface
Interface

Figure I-7 Block schematic view of the Ethernet Extension Board

B4008 Rev. M

33

CityLink

3.0
3.1

ODU
ODU Type I Description
The ODU Type I is an assembly of branching unit and transceiver unit
mounted behind the antenna or on a mounting frame on a pole/column. The
ODU is connected to the IDU with a single coaxial cable. The coaxial cable
provides Tx-IF, Rx-IF, signalling and power supply. For flexibility and easy
installation, the coaxial cable is connected to the transceiver through the
branching unit. The transceiver is attached to the branching with a snap on
system. With this solution, the coaxial
cable may remain connected during
transceiver replacement. In 1+0 configuration the branching unit is for a
single transceiver and in Hot Standby
configurations the branching is for dual
transceivers. The ODU and the antenna
are assembled very closely together
making it very compact. Nevertheless
the antenna can be separated from the
ODU by use of a flexible waveguide.
The branching unit contains RF channel filters, circulators and overvoltage
protection. The Hot Standby branching contains in addition a RF switch for
transmit direction and a RF power splitter for the receive direction.
The transceiver unit contains a microwave Tx/Rx module, a synthesised
local oscillator and a transceiver main board, all in a waterproof housing.
The transceiver is based on dual frequency conversion in the transmitter
and triple conversion in the receiver. This radio architecture with high IF
frequencies allows for use of wide band branching filters while still
maintaining excellent spectrum purity in transmitter and high selectivity
in receiver. The use of wide band branching filters allows for a wide choice
of remote channel frequency selection without changing hardware.
The microwave module is an integrated multi-chip module with GaAs
HEMT MMICs for Power Amplifier and Low Noise Amplifier. The
necessary LO frequencies for the frequency converters are generated in
a low phase noise synthesiser unit. The channel frequency is remotely
programmed from the indoor unit. Transmit/receive IF-chain, controlcircuits, signalling and power supply are integrated on the transceiver main
board.

34

B4008 Rev. M

Figure I-8

B4008 Rev. M

IF
IN /
OUT

140 MHz

350 MHz

IF LOOP

350 MHz

UHF LO

UHF LO

210 MHz

PREDIST

CTRL / M/T COM / POWER

350
MHz

CAB.
EQ.

SYNTHESIZER

UHF
IF

7 GHz
FIXED

2 GHz
SYNTH

DUPLEX
FREQ

TRANSCEIVER UNIT

TRANSCEIVER MAIN BOARD

XN

MICROWAVE MODULE

PWR

BRANCHING
UNIT

IF IN / OUT
M / T COM
DC PWR

ANTENNA
UNIT

Equipment Description

Block schematic view of the ODU Type I, 18GHz, in 1+0 configuration

35

CityLink
3.2

ODU Type II Description


The Type II of the ODU consists of a weatherproof
box containing the branching system. The ODU
box is mounted on a pole/column behind the antenna. The Transceiver unit is a plug-in unit mounted in
the box. In 1+0 configuration the ODU box contains a 1+0 branching unit for a single transceiver
and in Hot Standby configurations the ODU box
contains a Hot Standby branching unit and dual
transceivers. The branching unit contains RF channel filters and the diplexer. The Hot Standby branching contains in addition an RF switch for transmit
direction and an RF power splitter for the receive
direction.
The transceiver unit contains 7 modules/sub-units;
a microwave transmitter module, a receiver module, 3 local oscillators, an IF &controller board and a detector board. The
transceiver is connected to the modem/IDU with a single coaxial cable that
carries Tx-IF, Rx-IF and signalling (MTcom). Power is supplied through
a separate connector (D-sub), and for the split mount case this power is
separated from the coaxial cable in the ODU container (box).
The transceiver utilises a single conversion scheme in the transmitter and
a dual conversion in the receiver. In order to obtain an optimum spectrum
mask, the transmitter chain contains predistortion circuitry at IF before
the microwave upconverter and power amplifier. Narrow channel filters in
the branching unit further reduces the spectrum mask. The second converter in the receive chain allows for an IF loop-back facility for diagnostics
purposes. LO frequencies for the microwave frequency converters are
generated in synthesised DROs. The oscillators are by nature fixed in
frequency, i.e. they can only be remotely programmed within a narrow
range. When necessary, the oscillators can be adjusted within a range of
approx. 200 MHz with a mechanical screw (see Section VII Chapter
4.5.2.3 for guidance). Power supply, transmit/receive IF-chain, signalling
and controller (DSP) for the transceiver are integrated on the IF &controller board.
The branching unit contains narrow RF channel filters and circulators.

36

B4008 Rev. M

Figure I-9

B4008 Rev. M

48V

MTcom

Rx IF
140 MHz

Tx IF
350 MHz

CTRL

140 MHz

IF&CTRL Bd.

DC/DC

MTCom.

Multiplexer

350 MHz

Predistortion &
AGC

140 MHz

DSB
Mixer

210 MHz

IFSynt.

Synthesizer Unit

FLTR &
AGC

IF loop

AGC & Cable


equalizer

FLTR &
AGC

RxSynt.

TxSynt.

350
MHz

Rx LO

Tx LO

RCVR Module

IMR
Mixer

SSB
Upconverter

XMTR Module

IMD
Det.

LO
Det.

Low Noise
Amplifier

350
MHz

LO, IMD mxr

Power
Amplifier

RF in

RF out

Equipment Description

Block schematic view of the ODU Type II, 7GHz, in 1+0 configuration

37

CityLink
3.3

ODU Type III Description


Type III of the ODU consists of a single
ODU (in 1+0 configuration) mounted
behind the antenna and attached to the
antenna by means of four snap-on
clamps. The ODU is connected to the
IDU via a single coaxial cable which
carries transmitter IF, receive IF and
control and monitoring signals, as well
as DC power. In 2+0 and 1+1 hot standby configurations both ODUs are attached by the same snap-on clamps to a
branching hybrid. This hybrid can either be bolted directly to the antenna or
via a short length of flexible waveguide.
The branching hybrid contains an RF
splitter and combiner.
The ODU consists of a weatherproof housing containing a microwave
transmit/receive module, a synthesised local oscillator module and an IF
and control transceiver main board. The transceiver is based on a dual upconversion and triple down-conversion scheme, which allows the use of
wide-band duplex filters and therefore a wide choice of remote channel
frequency selection. To optimise the transmitter spectrum the transmitter
employs pre-distortion at IF as well as cable equalisation to correct for
variable loss and slope in the cable.
The microwave transmit/receive module consists of a multi-chip module
using a set of GaAs HEMT MMICs, both for the transmitter power
amplifier and the low-noise receiver. The required local oscillator signals
are fed from the synthesised local oscillator module and up-converted
using a diode multiplier. The channel frequency is remotely selected via
the IDU. Transmit/receive IF multiplexing, control and monitoring and
power supply functions are all integrated on the transceiver main board.

38

B4008 Rev. M

Figure I-10

B4008 Rev. M

DIPLEXER

EQUALISER

SLOPE

MAIN BOARD

PREDIST

210MHz

DUPLEX
FREQ.

TRANSCEIVER

SYNTHEZISER
7-9 GHz

MICROWAVE CONVERTER

UHF LO2 (LO1)

UHF LO1 (LO2)

DIPLEXER

ANTENNA

Equipment Description

Block schematic view of the ODU Type III

39

CityLink

4.0

Management
An integrated supervision system makes the CityLink capable of functioning as a Network Element (NE) in a managed SDH transmission network.
Management and supervision of the CityLink can be performed in various
ways from very simple alarm monitoring to standardised management
through optional built-in NE agents. Standardised use of QECC, according
to ITU-T Rec. G.784, is provided.
As an option, the CityLink also supports embedded SNMP agent that can
be controlled by SNMP based manager supplied by the service provider.
For element and network management the NEW-NMS (Nera Element vieW
- Network Management System) software provides the full range of management functionality; Fault, Performance, Security and Configuration.
The integrated SNMP agent provides interface to higher level Network
Management Systems.
The alternative interfaces available at the IDU are described in Appendix
I; IDU Interface Description.

5.0

System Configurations
CityLink is available in the following configurations:
Frequency Band

L6 11 GHz

13 15 GHz

1+0 (Unprotected)

OK

1+1 (Hot Standby)

OK

1+1 Frequency Diversity

OK

26 38 GHz

NA

1+1 (Hot Standby) Dual Baseband

OK

OK

OK

NA

1+1 (Hot Standby) Dual antenna

TBD

TBD

TBD

OK

32 TCM only

32 TCM only 1

2+0 Dual frequency Single


polarisation (DF-SP)
2+0 Single frequency Dual Polarisation
(SF-DP)

OK
NA

NA

2+0 Alternating Polarisation (AP)

OK 1

1+0 prepared for 2+0

OK

Table I-1

40

18 23 GHz

System Configurations

B4008 Rev. M

Equipment Description
Space Diversity and Hybrid Space Diversity is available as specified in the
table below.
L6 11 GHz

13 15 GHz

18 23 GHz

26 38 GHz

Space Diversity with IF combining


1+0,1+1 FD, HSB

Frequency Band

OK

NA

NA

NA

Hybrid Space Diversity (HSB)

OK

NA

NA

NA

Hybrid Space Diversity (1+1 FD)

OK

OK

OK

NA

Table I-2

5.1

Space Diversity Configurations

1+0Configuration
This system consists of one indoor unit and one outdoor unit interconnected
with a single coaxial cable.
Figure1-11 shows a 1+0 system overview. Each of the shaded area represents
a function or unit. The IDU is a single unit with plug-in STM-1 line interface
and the optional Multiplexer Unit. The ODU is assembled by transceiver and
branching.

Aux
traffic

SDH/SONET
Processing

Management

Management
&
SNMP Agent

Optional
Plug-in
Multiplex Unit
DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

STM-1/OC-3
Plug-in
Line Interface

Modulator
Demodulator

155 Mb/s

Transceiver

Branching

Antenna

Coaxial cable
(up to 300 m)

Indoor unit (IDU)

Figure I-11

B4008 Rev. M

1+0 System Overview

41

CityLink
5.2

Hot Standby Configuration


In Hot Standby configuration the IDU, the transceiver unit, and the coaxial
cable between IDU and ODU are duplicated. The two transceivers share the
same branching unit/hybrid. A switch at radio frequency level, included in
the branching unit 1, allows for switching between the two transmitters. A
Switching Unit is placed between the two IDUs and performs hitless
switching in the receive direction. The STM-1 line interface and Multiplex
plug-in modules are mounted in this switching unit. Signal interconnection
between the IDUs and the switching unit is by a multi connector and a split
cable.

155Mbit/s

Aux
traffic
Management

STM-1/OC-3
Plug-in
Line Interface
Management
&
SNMP Agent

SDH/SONET
Processing

Management

DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

Optional
plug-in
Multiplex Unit
SDH/SONET
Processing

DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

Management

Modulator
Demodulator

SDH/SONET
Processing

Modulator
Demodulator

1) Some ODU types use a passive combiner/splitter at RF level.

Coaxial cable
(up to 300 m)

Transceiver
Unit
Branching
Unit

Antenna
unit

Transceiver
Unit

Outdoor unit (ODU)

Indoor unit (IDU)

Figure I-12

5.3

1+1 Frequency Diversity and Hot Standby System Overview

1+1 Frequency Diversity


A 1+1 Frequency Diversity system contains duplicated IDU and ODU and
a 1+1 FD branching. (Dual polarised branching can also be used.). A
switching Unit is placed between the two IDUs and performs hitless
switching in the receive direction. The interface units are mounted in the
switching unit. Signal interconnection between the IDUs and the switching
unit is by a multi connector and a split cable.

42

B4008 Rev. M

Equipment Description
5.4

Hot Standby Configuration Dual Antenna

155Mbit/s

Aux
traffic
Management

STM-1/OC-3
Plug-in
Line Interface
Management
&
SNMP Agent

SDH/SONET
Processing

Management

DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

Optional
plug-in
Multiplex Unit

Coaxial cable
(up to 300 m)

Transceiver
Unit
Branching
Unit

Antenna
unit

Branching
Unit

Antenna
unit

SDH/SONET
Processing

DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

Management

Modulator
Demodulator

SDH/SONET
Processing

Modulator
Demodulator

The Hot Standby configuration is for 26-38 GHz also available with duplicated antenna. There is no Tx-switch at radio frequency level and the standby
transmitter is muted. Both receivers are active and selection of receive signal
is performed by the IDU-switch. This configuration gives better system gain
as no HSB-hybrid loss is added.

Transceiver
Unit

Outdoor unit (ODU)

Indoor unit (IDU)

Figure I-13

B4008 Rev. M

Hot Standby-Dual Antenna System Overview

43

CityLink
5.5

Hot Standby Configuration Dual Baseband


A special variant of the Hot Standby system is the Dual baseband option.
In this configuration both IDUs are equipped with STM-1 line interface units.
The switching unit is not used in this configuration. The feature enables line
protection when used with muxes with dual/protected interfaces

SDH/SONET
Processing

Management

Management
&
SNMP Agent

Aux
traffic

SDH/SONET
Processing

Management

Management
&
SNMP Agent

Coaxial cable
(up to 300 m)

Transceiver
Unit

Branching
Unit

STM-1/OC-3
Plug-in
Line Interface
DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

155 Mb/s

DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

Aux
traffic

Modulator
Demodulator

STM-1/OC-3
Plug-in
Line Interface

Modulator
Demodulator

155 Mb/s

Antenna
unit

Transceiver
Unit

Outdoor unit (ODU)

Indoor unit (IDU)

Figure I-14

44

Hot Standby-Dual Baseband System Overview

B4008 Rev. M

Equipment Description
5.6

2+0 Configuration
The 2+0 system can be used in two types of configuration, using one or two
polarisations. Single Frequency Dual Polarisation (SF-DP) and Alternating
Polarisation (AP) utilise both polarisations in order to double the capacity.
Dual Frequency Single Polarisation (DF-SP) requires two channels in order
to transmit 2xSTM-1. With this configuration, adjacent channels cannot be
used. Figure I-15 and Figure I-16 show block diagrams of the 2+0 configurations.

Aux
traffic

SDH/SONET
Processing

Management

Management
&
SNMP Agent

Optional
Plug-in
Multiplex Unit
DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

STM-1/OC-3
Plug-in
Line Interface

Modulator
Demodulator

155 Mb/s

Transceiver

Coaxial cable
(up to 300 m)

Branching

H-pol

Antenna

Indoor unit (IDU)

Aux
traffic

SDH/SONET
Processing

Management

Management
&
SNMP Agent

Transceiver

Optional
Plug-in
Multiplex Unit
DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

STM-1/OC-3
Plug-in
Line Interface

Modulator
Demodulator

155 Mb/s

V-pol

Branching
Coaxial cable
(up to 300 m)

Outdoor unit (ODU)

Indoor unit (IDU)

STM-1/OC-3
Plug-in
Line Interface

Aux
traffic

SDH/SONET
Processing

Management

Management
&
SNMP Agent

Optional
Plug-in
Multiplex Unit
DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

155 Mb/s

Single Frequency - Dual Polarisation / Alternating


Polarisation

Modulator
Demodulator

Figure I-15

Indoor unit (IDU)

Aux
traffic

SDH/SONET
Processing

Management

Management
&
SNMP Agent

Optional
Plug-in
Multiplex Unit
DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

STM-1/OC-3
Plug-in
Line Interface

Modulator
Demodulator

155 Mb/s

Coaxial cable
(up to 300 m)

Transceiver

Branching

Antenna

Transceiver

Outdoor unit (ODU)

Indoor unit (IDU)

Figure I-16
B4008 Rev. M

Dual Frequency - Single Polarisation


45

CityLink
5.7

Space Diversity

Management

DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

SDH/SONET
Processing

Modulator
Demodulator

Space diversity with IF combining is available in the frequencies from L6 to


11GHz. It can be used in combination with all other configurations. The figure
below shows a 1+1 Frequency Diversity or HSB system.

Outdoor unit (ODU)


Coaxial cable
(up to 300 m)

155Mbit/s

Aux
traffic
Management

STM-1/OC-3
Plug-in
Line Interface

Optional
plug-in
Multiplex Unit

Main
Antenna

SD
Transceiver
Main Branching
SD Branching

Management
&
SNMP Agent

SDH/SONET
Processing

SD
Transceiver

DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

Management

Modulator
Demodulator

WG
SDH/SONET
Processing

SD
Antenna

Indoor unit (IDU)

Figure I-17

5.8

Space Diversity

Hybrid Space Diversity


Hybrid Space Diversity using standard XCVRs without IF combining is
available for 1+1 FD and HSB.
In HSB configuration the splitter in the receiver branch is omitted and each
receiver is connected to separate antennas. The transmitters are using the
main antenna. Waveguide is needed from the ODU to the SD antenna. The
configuration is available for L6-11 GHz systems.

46

B4008 Rev. M

Management

DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

SDH/SONET
Processing

Modulator
Demodulator

Equipment Description

Outdoor unit (ODU)


Coaxial cable
(up to 300 m)

155Mbit/s

Aux
traffic
Management

STM-1/OC-3
Plug-in
Line Interface

Main
Antenna

Transceiver

Optional
plug-in
Multiplex Unit

M ain Branching
SD Branching

Management
&
SNMP Agent

SDH/SONET
Processing

Transceiver

DC power feeding
& overvoltage
protection

Management

Modulator
Demodulator

WG
SDH/SONET
Processing

SD
Antenna

Indoor unit (IDU)

Figure I-18

HSB Hybrid Space Diversity

In 1+1 system hybrid diversity is implemented by using two antennas at one


of the sites. At this site one channel is connected to each antenna. In principle
it is two 1+0 ODU operating at differnet frequencies. At the other site normal
1+1 FD system is used.

IDU
User
Interfaces

Figure I-19

IDU

f1
1+1
ODU

Switch

IDU

B4008 Rev. M

1+0
ODU

1+0
ODU

f2

Switch

User
Interfaces

IDU

1+1 Hybrid Space Diversity

47

CityLink
5.9

Radio Terminal Configurations


The radio channel can be configured with RS- or MS-termination according
to ITU-T Rec.G.783.
Figure 1-20 shows examples of various configurations. MST configuration
requires the optional SETS function.

RRT

RRT

RS
Other MS
equipment

MS

Figure I-20

5.10

RRT

RRT

RS
MS

RS

MS

MS

Other MS
equipment

Configuration Examples

Radio Repeater Configurations


A radio repeater is built by using two terminals. The interface between the
terminals is at STM-1. The repeater can be configured with RS-termination
according to ITU-T Rec. G.783.

5.11

Radio Channel Identification


The radio channel is identified by two allocated bits in the media specific byte
(MS#3) in the SOH. The channel identification can be configured by the user.

This page is intentionally left blank.


48

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation

SECTION II
Installation of
ODU Type I and Antenna

B4008 Rev. M

49

CityLink

1.0

General
This section assumes that pre-planning of the link has been performed, i.e.
path budgeting & survey to ensure good line-of sight between the two link
ends.

1.1

Packing
Any sensitive product, i.e. IDU and Printed Circuit Boards, are packed in
special antistatic handling bags or boxes.
It is therefore essential that whenever unpacking or disassembling the
equipment and or handling printed circuit boards etc., special precautions
to avoid ESD (Electro Static Discharge) should be taken, such as using
wrist grounding or corresponding protection.
The equipment is packed in sealed plastic bags which are equipped with
required moisture protection.
All equipment is further packed in special designed cases prepared for
transportation.
Dimensions and weight of each case are specified in the "Packing
specifications" issued for the respective shipment.

1.2

Marking
Marking is done according to customers requirements. If such information is unavailable, the equipment is marked in the following way:
Customer address
Contract No.
Site Name (if known)
Case No.

1.3

Transportation
The transport containers are prepared for shipment by air, truck, railway
and sea, suitable for handling by fork-lift trucks and slings.
The cargo must be kept dry during transport and storage.
For sea-transport, deck-side shipment is not permitted and carrier-owned
cargo containers should be used.

50

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


1.4

Radio Equipment Inventory Check


Look for damage on the cases. Ensure that correct quantities of goods have
arrived, according to the packing list in each package/unit.
Check also that the part description on the outside of each box corresponds to the components required for the installation, i.e. correct antenna
and frequency, ODU frequency band and sub-band, IDU configuration.
Report any damages or missing items to Nera ASA by e-mail or fax. A short
description of damages, preferably including photographs, should be sent
as soon as possible.

1.5

Preparation for Installation


Complete the required civil works. Transport all the equipment to site.
Unpack the equipment and inspect for damage during transit to site and
make sure that the correct quantities of goods have arrived.
Units with static discharge protection should not be unpacked until the
equipment installation takes place. Ensure you are grounded at a controlled ESD point before and during insertion, and during any subsequent
unpacking of the unit.

1.6

Handling & Storage


It is recommended that components are stored and transported to the
installation site in their original packing cases. If items are unpacked for
storage, they should be handled with care and protected during transportation by similar protective materials.
The equipment is an electronic device which should be handled with care.
It should be stored in dry, cool conditions, out of direct sunlight. A
moisture absorbing bag is taped inside the transportation unit to minimise
condensation during transportation. This is to be removed at installation.
No maintenance is required when stored according to particulars above.
To avoid damage to the sealing components and unwanted moist in the
interconnection interfaces, the transportation protection lids on the branching and the transceiver must be kept on until mounting of waveguide
components and connection of the transceiver to the branching unit.

B4008 Rev. M

51

CityLink

2.0
2.1

Installation Equipment required


Tools
The tools needed to install the equipment are listed in the following subchapters.

2.1.1

Tools for Antenna Installation

2.1.2

52

2 pcs Combination Wrench 13 mm


2 pcs Combination Wrench 16 mm
2 pcs Combination Wrench 17 mm
1 pc Torque Wrench 16 mm, 40 - 50 Nm

Tools for IDU- ODU Cable /Connector Mounting

1 Hacksaw, fine-toothed
1 Soldering Iron, 50-150W
Solder 36/37 RMA flux core
Cloth
1 Knife
1 Flat file, fine
1 Wire brush
1 Tape rule (or caliper)
1 Heat gun, 1000W
1 Cutting pliers

for

hexagon coupling nut :


1 Wrench 1/2" (13mm)
1 Wrench 9/16" (15mm)
1 Wrench 11/16" (18mm)
1 Wrench 13/16" (21mm)

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


2.2

Equipment external to the Radio Equipment


In addition to the necessary radio equipment & antenna the following
items are needed:

B4008 Rev. M

Coaxial cable between IDU and ODU. See Section V, chapter 5 for
advise on which cable to use.
At least two N-type connectors suitable for termination of the
selected coaxial cable.
Suitable waveguide & flanges between antenna and branching unit if
remote mount option is used.
Cable to ground the ODU.
Cable to ground the IDU.
Cable to power the IDU.
Cable to connect the PC, running the configuration & set-up program,
to the IDU.
Cable ties to secure cable runs.
Cables for user interfaces.

53

CityLink

3.0

ODU / Antenna Installation, 1+0 Equipment

3.1

Installation of 0.6m and 0.45m Antenna

3.1.1

Preparing the Suspension for ODU Mounting


Loosen this nut one turn.

Bracket
Rotate the bracket 1800 by
turning this bolt CW.

54

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


3.1.2

Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension


All the described nuts and washers are included in the antenna assembly
and come attached to the antenna.

4ea M8 Nuts and washers

B4008 Rev. M

55

CityLink
3.1.3

Mounting the Branching Support Bracket

M8x25

BRANCHING
SUPPORT
BRACKET

56

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


3.1.4

Mounting the Rear Travers

M8x25
REAR TRAVERS

3.1.5

Mounting the Suspension Support Bracket

SUSPENSION
SUPPORT
BRACKET

M8x25
B4008 Rev. M

57

CityLink
3.1.6

Mounting the Bend on the Branching Unit

M3 STUDS,
NUTS AND
WASHERS

FEED

O-RING

58

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


3.1.7

Installation of the Branching Unit

BRANCHING
UNIT

M8 STUDS,
NUTS AND
WASHERS

Grounding point.
See Section V Chapter 5.0 Fig. V-8

3.1.8

Attachment of the Sunshield Support


M8x30
SCREW,
NUT AND
WASHERS

SUNSHIELD
SUPPORT
M8x30 SCREW,
NUT AND
WASHERS
B4008 Rev. M

59

CityLink
3.1.9

Installation of the Flexible Waveguide


M3 ALLEN
SCREWS,
NUT AND
WASHERS

2 O-RINGS

60

O-RING

M3 STUDS,
NUT AND
WASHERS

R220 FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


3.1.10

Installation of the Sunshield


M6x25 SCREWS,
NUTS, LARGE WASHERS AND WASHERS

(PLACING OF
LARGE WASHER)

M4 ALLEN SCREW
(FOUND MOUNTED
ON THE BRANCHING
UNIT)

M4x16 SCREWS,
NUTS AND
WASHERS

SUNSHIELD

B4008 Rev. M

61

CityLink
3.1.11

Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Column or a Wall

3.1.11.1

Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Column by


using the U-bolts

U-BOLTS
(ABZ5479 for
column
diameter
115mm,
ABZ5480 for
column
diameter
75mm)

M10 Nuts, washers and lock


washers, 4ea
Torque: 25-30Nm

62

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


3.1.11.2

Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Column by


using the Clamps

CLAMPS, 2ea
(ABZ5481)

Column diameter:
60-115mm
M10 Nuts and washers, 4ea
Torque: 35Nm

B4008 Rev. M

63

CityLink
3.1.11.3

Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Wall

M10 Expansion
bolts (type
dependant on
the nature of the
wall

M10 Nuts and washers

64

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


3.1.12

Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly


Before mounting the ODU to the antenna assembly, it is necessary to
remove the protection lid from the antenna feed. See below.

Protection lid

First remove the nuts using


a 5,5mm wrench.

Then remove the set screws


using a 1,5 mm allen key.

B4008 Rev. M

65

CityLink

66

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


3.1.13

Pole Mount

3.1.13.1

Assembly of Branching Support Bracket

CLAMP

M12 (Torque 19 NM)

BRANCHING
SUPPORT
BRACKET

3.1.13.2

Installation of Branching Unit and Sun-shield

BRANCHING UNIT
SUN-SHIELD

M4
M8
Grounding point.
See Section V Chapter 5.0 Fig. V-8
B4008 Rev. M

67

CityLink
3.2

Installation of 1.2m Antenna


This chapter only descibes how to install the CityLink branching support
bracket and the branching unit. For further instructions please refer to the
handbook supplied with the antenna (H2602; Installation Procedure for
1.2m Antenna).
For installation of the transceiver, see Chapter 3.1.7.

3.2.1

Assembly of Branching Support Bracket

HORIZONTAL
GIRDER

VERTICAL
GIRDER

BRANCHING
SUPPORT
BRACKET

HORIZONTAL
GIRDER

105mm 5

Make sure that the distance between the top of the branching support
bracket and the horizontal girder is 105mm 5mm.

BRANCHING
SUPPORT
BRACKET

68

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


3.2.3

Installation of Branching Unit,


Sun-shield and Flexible Waveguide
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
BRANCHING UNIT
SUN-SHIELD

M4

M8
ANTENNA
FEED
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE

NOTE!
Most antennas are delivered with a bimetallic shim. This MUST NOT be
mounted for 18-26GHz equipment as the ODU, the flexible waveguide
and the antenna all have aluminium waveguide connectors. Flexible
waveguides for 13-15GHz have silver plated brass flanges and the
bimetallic shim MUST be used (copper side facing flex-wg).
Mount gasket(s) between the antenna feed and the flexible waveguide
and also gasket(s) between the flexible waveguide and the branching
unit. If the installation is placed in a very corrosive environment, further
protection can be achieved by adding silicon rubber.

B4008 Rev. M

69

CityLink

4.0

ODU / Antenna Installation,


Hot Standby Equipment and 2+0 Equipment

4.1

0.45m and 0.6m Antenna

4.1.1

Installation of Hot Standby (HSB) and


2+0 Dual Frequency Single Polarization Equipment

4.1.1.1

Preparing the Suspension for ODU Mounting and


Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension
Please refer to Chapters 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 (this Section).

4.1.1.2

Mounting the Branching Support Bracket

M8x25

BRANCHING
SUPPORT
BRACKET

70

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


4.1.1.3

Mounting the Rear Travers, Mounting the Suspension


Support Bracket and Mounting the Feed on the
Branching Unit
Please refer to Chapters 3.1.4 to 3.1.6 (this Section).

4.1.1.4

Installation of the HSB Branching Unit

M8x25
STUDS,
NUTS
AND
WASHERS

BRANCHING UNIT

B4008 Rev. M

71

CityLink
4.1.1.5

Installation of the Flexible Waveguide


M3 ALLEN
SCREWS,
NUT AND
WASHERS

2 O-RINGS

72

O-RING

M3 STUDS,
NUT AND
WASHERS

R220 FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


4.1.1.6

Installation of the Sunshield Support Bracket


Please refer to Chapter 3.1.8 (this Section).

4.1.1.7

Installation of the Sunshield

M6x25 SCREWS, NUTS,


LARGE WASHERS AND
WASHERS
(PLACING OF
LARGE WASHER)

M4 ALLEN SCREW
(FOUND MOUNTED
ON THE BRANCHING
UNIT)

M4x16 SCREWS,
NUTS AND
WASHERS

SUNSHIELD

B4008 Rev. M

73

CityLink
4.1.1.8

Mounting the Suspension/ODU to a Column or a Wall


Please refer to Chapter 3.1.11 (this Section).

4.1.1.9

Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly


Before mounting the ODU to the antenna assembly, it is necessary to
remove the protection lid from the antenna feed. Please refer to Chapter
3.1.12 (this Section) for details.

74

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


4.1.1.10

Pole Mount

4.1.1.10.1 Assembly of Branching Support Bracket

CLAMP
M12 (Torque 19 NM)

BRANCHING
SUPPORT
BRACKET

4.1.10.1.2 Installation of Branching Unit and Sunshield

BRANCHING UNIT
SUN-SHIELD

M4
M8
Grounding point.
See Section V Chapter 5.0 Fig. V-9
B4008 Rev. M

75

CityLink
4.1.2

Installation of 2+0 Equipment


(Single Frequency Dual polarity)

4.1.2.1

Preparing the Suspension for ODU Mounting and


Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension
Please refer to Chapters 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 (this Section).

4.1.2.2

Mounting the Branching Support Bracket, Mounting the


Rear Travers, Mounting the Suspension Support
Bracket and Mounting the Feed on the Branching Units
Please refer to Chapters 3.1.3 to 3.1.6 (this Section).

4.1.2.3

Installation of the Branching Units

M8 STUDS,
NUTS AND
WASHERS

76

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


4.1.2.4

Installation of the Flexible Waveguide


M3 ALLEN
SCREWS,
NUT AND
WASHERS

M3 STUDS,
NUT AND
WASHERS
2 O-RINGS

R220 FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE

M3 ALLEN
SCREWS,
NUT AND
WASHERS

O-RING

2 O-RINGS

M3 STUDS,
NUT AND
WASHERS

B4008 Rev. M

77

CityLink
4.1.2.5

Installation of the Sunshield


M6x25 SCREWS,
NUTS, LARGE WASHERS AND WASHERS
(PLACING OF
LARGE WASHER)

M4 ALLEN SCREW
(FOUND MOUNTED
ON THE BRANCHING
UNIT)

78

SUNSHIELDS

M4 ALLEN SCREW
(FOUND MOUNTED
ON THE BRANCHING
UNIT)

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


4.1.2.6

Mounting the Suspension/ODU to a Column or a Wall


Please refer to Chapter 3.1.11 (this Section).

4.1.2.7

Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly


Before mounting the ODU to the antenna assembly, it is necessary to
remove the protection lid from the antenna feed. Please refer to Chapter
3.1.12 (this Section) for details.

B4008 Rev. M

79

CityLink
4.1.2.9

Pole Mount

4.1.2.9.1

Assembly of Branching Support Bracket

CLAMP
M12 (Torque 19 NM)

BRANCHING
SUPPORT
BRACKET

4.1.2.9.2

Installation of Branching Units and Sunshields

BRANCHING UNITS
SUN-SHIELDS

M4
M8
Grounding point.
See Section V Chapter 5.0 Fig. V-9
80

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


4.2

1.2m Antenna
This chapter only descibes how to install the CityLink branching support
bracket and the branching unit. For further instructions please refer to the
handbook supplied with the antenna (H2602; Installation Procedure for
1.2m Antenna).
For installation of the transceiver, see Chapter 4.1.5.

4.2.1

Assembly of Branching Support Bracket

HORIZONTAL
GIRDER
BRANCHING
SUPPORT
BRACKET
VERTICAL
GIRDER

HORIZONTAL
GIRDER

130mm
5
87mm3mm

Make sure that the distance between the top of the branching support
bracket and the horizontal girder is 130mm 3mm.

BRANCHING
SUPPORT
BRACKET

B4008 Rev. M

81

CityLink
4.2.2

Installation of Branching Unit, Sun-shield and Flexible


Waveguide

4.2.2.1

Hot Standby and 2+0 Dual Frequency Single Polarization

FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
BRANCHING UNIT

SUN-SHIELD

M4

M8

Grounding point.
See Section V Chapter 5.0
Fig. V-9
NOTE!
Most antennas are delivered with a bimetallic shim. This MUST
NOT be mounted for CityLink installations as the ODU, the
flexible waveguide and the antenna all have aluminium waveguide
connectors.
Mount gasket(s) between the antenna feed and the flexible
waveguide and also gasket(s) between the flexible waveguide
and the branching unit. If the installation is placed in a very
corrosive environment, further protection can be achieved by
adding silicon rubber.

82

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


4.2.2.2

2+0 Single Frequency Dual Polarization

FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDES
BRANCHING UNITS
SUN-SHIELDS

M4
M8
Grounding point.
See Section V Chapter 5.0
Fig. V-9

NOTE!
Most antennas are delivered with a bimetallic shim. This MUST
NOT be mounted for 18-26GHz equipment as the ODU, the
flexible waveguide and the antenna all have aluminium
waveguide connectors. Flexible waveguides for 13-15GHz have
silver plated brass flanges and the bimetallic shim MUST be
used (copper side facing flex-wg).
Mount gasket(s) between the antenna feed and the flexible
waveguide and also gasket(s) between the flexible waveguide
and the branching unit. If the installation is placed in a very
corrosive environment, further protection can be achieved by
adding silicon rubber.

B4008 Rev. M

83

CityLink

5.0 Frequency Tuning at 13GHz &15GHz Transceiver


This chapter gives a short description of how to set and change frequency
channel on the transceiver. To perform this operation it is necessary to
remove the cover and mount the transceiver to a branching connected to
an IDU. A PC (where Nera software NEW is installed) and power are
further connected to the IDU. A voltage meter and a screwdriver must also
be available.
Switch on the power at the system
Set wanted frequency in New.
Tables II-1 to II-9 give the relation between selected channel, duplex, TX
High/Low and RX High/Low. The illustration on the next page gives an
overview of the tuning voltage connectors (VT TX and VT RX) and tuning
screws.
WARNING!
This equipment contains components which are sensitive to
"ESD" (Electro Static Discharge). It is therefore essential that
whenever disassembling the equipment and/or handling PC
boards, special precautions to avoid ESD have to be made.
This includes personnel grounding, grounding of work bench,
grounding of tools and instruments. For the tuning process,
it is also recommended to use a ceramic screw driver.
Measure the tuning voltage VT TX continuously while adjusting the
tuning screw. First turn the tuning screw CCW as far as it goes. Then
adjust it CW until VT TX reaches the correct voltage:
For 15GHz Transceiver; 40.5[V]
For 13GHz Transceiver; 30.5[V]
Measure the tuning voltage VT RX continuously when adjusting the
tuning screw. First turn the tuning screw CCW as far as it goes. Then
adjust it CW until VT TX reaches the correct voltage:
For 15GHz Transceiver; 40.5[V]
For 13GHz Transceiver; 30.5[V]
After tuning VT TX and VT RX to the correct voltage, the transceiver is
configured to the correct frequency channel. Inspect the gasket and
replace the cover with use of correct torque (1.25Nm).

84

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation

VT TX

GND

VT RX

B4008 Rev. M

Tx High

Rx High

Tx Low

Rx Low

85

CityLink
Duplex frequency: 490 MHz
Channel spacing: 28MHz
TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

TX
Freq.
14417
14445
14473
14501
14529
14557
14585
14613
14641
14669
14697
14725
14753
14781
14809
14837

10L15L01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4
Low
5
Low
6
Low
7
Low
8
Low
9
High
10
High
11
High
12
High
13
High
14
High
15
High
16

RX
Freq.
14907
14935
14963
14991
15019
15047
15075
15103
15131
15159
15187
15215
15243
15271
15299
15327

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
High

TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

TX
Freq.
14907
14935
14963
14991
15019
15047
15075
15103
15131
15159
15187
15215
15243
15271
15299
15327

10L15U01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4
Low
5
Low
6
Low
7
Low
8
High
9
High
10
High
11
High
12
High
13
High
14
High
15
High
16

RX
Freq.
14417
14445
14473
14501
14529
14557
14585
14613
14641
14669
14697
14725
14753
14781
14809
14837

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
High
High

10L15U01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4
Low
5
Low
6
Low
7
High
8
High
9
High
10
High
11
High
12
High
13
High
14
High
15

RX
Freq.
14515
14543
14571
14599
14627
14655
14683
14711
14739
14767
14795
14823
14851
14879
14907

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High

10L15U01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
High
1
High
2
High
3
High
4

RX
Freq.
14515
14543
14571
14599

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low

Table II-1
Duplex frequency: 420 MHz
Channel spacing: 28MHz
TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TX
Freq.
14515
14543
14571
14599
14627
14655
14683
14711
14739
14767
14795
14823
14851
14879
14907

10L15L01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4
Low
5
Low
6
High
7
High
8
High
9
High
10
High
11
High
12
High
13
High
14
High
15

RX
Freq.
14935
14963
14991
15019
15047
15075
15103
15131
15159
15187
15215
15243
15271
15299
15327

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High

TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TX
Freq.
14935
14963
14991
15019
15047
15075
15103
15131
15159
15187
15215
15243
15271
15299
15327

Table II-2
Duplex frequency: 728 MHz
Channel spacing: 28MHz
TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4

TX
Freq.
14515
14543
14571
14599

10L15L01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4

RX
Freq.
15243
15271
15299
15327

RX
DRO
High
High
High
High

TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4

TX
Freq.
15243
15271
15299
15327

Table II-3

86

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


Duplex frequency: 315 MHz
Channel spacing: 28MHz
TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

TX
Freq.
14662
14690
14718
14746
14774
14802
14830
14858
14886

10L15L01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
High
2
High
3
High
4
High
5
High
6
High
7
High
8
High
9

RX
Freq.
14977
15005
15033
15061
15089
15117
15145
15173
15201

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High

TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

TX
Freq.
14977
15005
15033
15061
15089
15117
15145
15173
15201

10L15U01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4
Low
5
Low
6
High
7
High
8
High
9

RX
Freq.
14662
14690
14718
14746
14774
14802
14830
14858
14886

RX
DRO
Low
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High

10L15U01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
High
1
High
2
High
3
High
4
High
5
High
6
High
7

RX
Freq.
14515
14543
14571
14599
14627
14655
14683

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High

10L15U01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4
Low
5
Low
6
Low
7
Low
8
Low
9
Low
10
Low
11
Low
12
Low
13
Low
14
High
15
High
16
High
17
High
18
High
19
High
20
High
21
High
22
High
23
High
24
High
25
High
26
High
27
High
28
High
29
High
30

RX
Freq.
14515
14529
14543
14557
14571
14585
14599
14613
14627
14641
14655
14669
14683
14697
14711
14725
14739
14753
14767
14781
14795
14809
14823
14837
14851
14865
14879
14893
14907
14921

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High

Table II-4
Duplex frequency: 644 MHz
Channel spacing: 28MHz
TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

TX
Freq.
14515
14543
14571
14599
14627
14655
14683

10L15L01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4
Low
5
Low
6
High
7

RX
Freq.
15159
15187
15215
15243
15271
15299
15327

RX
DRO
High
High
High
High
High
High
High

TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

TX
Freq.
15159
15187
15215
15243
15271
15299
15327

Table II-5
Duplex frequency: 420 MHz
Channel spacing: 14MHz
TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

TX
Freq.
14515
14529
14543
14557
14571
14585
14599
14613
14627
14641
14655
14669
14683
14697
14711
14725
14739
14753
14767
14781
14795
14809
14823
14837
14851
14865
14879
14893
14907
14921

10L15L01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4
Low
5
Low
6
Low
7
Low
8
Low
9
Low
10
Low
11
High
12
High
13
High
14
High
15
High
16
High
17
High
18
High
19
High
20
High
21
High
22
High
23
High
24
High
25
High
26
High
27
High
28
High
29
High
30

RX
Freq.
14935
14949
14963
14977
14991
15005
15019
15033
15047
15061
15075
15089
15103
15117
15131
15145
15159
15173
15187
15201
15215
15229
15243
15257
15271
15285
15299
15313
15327
15341

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High

TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

TX
Freq.
14935
14949
14963
14977
14991
15005
15019
15033
15047
15061
15075
15089
15103
15117
15131
15145
15159
15173
15187
15201
15215
15229
15243
15257
15271
15285
15299
15313
15327
15341

Table II-6
B4008 Rev. M

87

CityLink
Duplex frequency: 490 MHz
Channel spacing: 14MHz
TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

TX
Freq.
14417
14431
14445
14459
14473
14487
14501
14515
14529
14543
14557
14571
14585
14599
14613
14627
14641
14655
14669
14683
14697
14711
14725
14739
14753
14767
14781
14795
14809
14823
14837
14851

10L15L01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4
Low
5
Low
6
Low
7
Low
8
Low
9
Low
10
Low
11
Low
12
Low
13
Low
14
Low
15
Low
16
High
17
High
18
High
19
High
20
High
21
High
22
High
23
High
24
High
25
High
26
High
27
High
28
High
29
High
30
High
31
High
32

RX
Freq.
14907
14921
14935
14949
14963
14977
14991
15005
15019
15033
15047
15061
15075
15089
15103
15117
15131
15145
15159
15173
15187
15201
15215
15229
15243
15257
15271
15285
15299
15313
15327
15341

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High

TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

TX
Freq.
14907
14921
14935
14949
14963
14977
14991
15005
15019
15033
15047
15061
15075
15089
15103
15117
15131
15145
15159
15173
15187
15201
15215
15229
15243
15257
15271
15285
15299
15313
15327
15341

10L15U01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4
Low
5
Low
6
Low
7
Low
8
Low
9
Low
10
Low
11
Low
12
Low
13
Low
14
Low
15
Low
16
High
17
High
18
High
19
High
20
High
21
High
22
High
23
High
24
High
25
High
26
High
27
High
28
High
29
High
30
High
31
High
32

RX
Freq.
14417
14431
14445
14459
14473
14487
14501
14515
14529
14543
14557
14571
14585
14599
14613
14627
14641
14655
14669
14683
14697
14711
14725
14739
14753
14767
14781
14795
14809
14823
14837
14851

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High

10L13U01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
High
1
High
2
High
3
High
4
High
5
High
6
High
7
High
8

RX
Freq.
12765
12793
12821
12849
12877
12905
12933
12961

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low

Table II-7
Duplex frequency: 266 MHz
Channel spacing: 28MHz
TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TX
Freq.
12765
12793
12821
12849
12877
12905
12933
12961

10L13L01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4
Low
5
Low
6
Low
7
Low
8

RX
Freq.
13031
13059
13087
13115
13143
13171
13199
13227

RX
DRO
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High

TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TX
Freq.
13031
13059
13087
13115
13143
13171
13199
13227

Table II-8

88

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type I Installation


Duplex frequency: 266 MHz
Channel spacing: 14MHz
TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

TX
Freq.
12758
12772
12786
12800
12814
12828
12842
12856
12870
12884
12898
12912
12926
12940
12954
12968

10L13L01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
Low
1
Low
2
Low
3
Low
4
Low
5
Low
6
Low
7
Low
8
Low
9
Low
10
Low
11
Low
12
Low
13
Low
14
Low
15
Low
16

RX
Freq.
13024
13038
13052
13066
13080
13094
13108
13122
13136
13150
13164
13178
13192
13206
13220
13234

RX
DRO
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High

TX
Ch.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

TX
Freq.
13024
13038
13052
13066
13080
13094
13108
13122
13136
13150
13164
13178
13192
13206
13220
13234

10L13U01A
TX
RX
DRO
Ch.
High
1
High
2
High
3
High
4
High
5
High
6
High
7
High
8
High
9
High
10
High
11
High
12
High
13
High
14
High
15
High
16

RX
Freq.
12758
12772
12786
12800
12814
12828
12842
12856
12870
12884
12898
12912
12926
12940
12954
12968

RX
DRO
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low

Table II-9

B4008 Rev. M

89

CityLink

6.0

Cable Connections
Please refer to Section V Chapter 5.0.

7.0

Antenna Alignment
Please refer to Section IV Chapter 6.0.

90

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type II Installation

SECTION III
Installation of
ODU Type II and Antenna

B4008 Rev. M

91

CityLink

1.0

General
This section assumes that pre-planning of the link has been performed, i.e.
path budgeting & survey to ensure good line-of sight between the two link
ends.

1.1

Packing
Any sensitive product, i.e. IDU and Printed Circuit Boards, are packed in
special antistatic handling bags or boxes.
It is therefore essential that whenever unpacking or disassembling the
equipment and or handling printed circuit boards etc., special precautions
to avoid ESD (Electro Static Discharge) should be taken, such as using
wrist grounding or corresponding protection.
The equipment is packed in sealed plastic bags which are equipped with
required moisture protection.
All equipment is further packed in special designed cases prepared for
transportation.
Dimensions and weight of each case are specified in the "Packing
specifications" issued for the respective shipment.

1.2

Marking
Marking is done according to customers requirements. If such information is unavailable, the equipment is marked in the following way:
Customer address
Contract No.
Site Name (if known)
Case No.

1.3

Transportation
The transport containers are prepared for shipment by air, truck, railway
and sea, suitable for handling by fork-lift trucks and slings.
The cargo must be kept dry during transport and storage.
For sea-transport, deck-side shipment is not permitted and carrier-owned
cargo containers should be used.

92

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type II Installation


1.4

Radio Equipment Inventory Check


Look for damage on the cases. Ensure that correct quantities of goods have
arrived, according to the packing list in each package/unit.
Check also that the part description on the outside of each box corresponds to the components required for the installation, i.e. correct antenna
and frequency, ODU frequency band and sub-band, IDU configuration.
Report any damages or missing items to Nera ASA by e-mail or fax. A short
description of damages, preferably including photographs, should be sent
as soon as possible.

1.5

Preparation for Installation


Complete the required civil works. Transport all the equipment to site.
Unpack the equipment and inspect for damage during transit to site and
make sure that the correct quantities of goods have arrived.
Units with static discharge protection should not be unpacked until the
equipment installation takes place. Ensure you are grounded at a controlled ESD point before and during insertion, and during any subsequent
unpacking of the unit.

1.6

Handling & Storage


It is recommended that components are stored and transported to the
installation site in their original packing cases. If items are unpacked for
storage, they should be handled with care and protected during transportation by similar protective materials.
The equipment is an electronic device which should be handled with care.
It should be stored in dry, cool conditions, out of direct sunlight. A
moisture absorbing bag is taped inside the transportation unit to minimise
condensation during transportation. This is to be removed at installation.
No maintenance is required when stored according to particulars above.
To avoid damage to the sealing components and unwanted moist in the
interconnection interfaces, the transportation protection lids on the branching and the transceiver must be kept on until mounting of waveguide
components and connection of the transceiver to the branching unit.

B4008 Rev. M

93

CityLink

2.0
2.1

Installation Equipment required


Tools
The tools needed to install the equipment are listed in the following subchapters.

2.1.1

Tools for Antenna Installation

2.1.2

94

2 pcs Combination Wrench 13 mm


2 pcs Combination Wrench 16 mm
2 pcs Combination Wrench 17 mm
1 pc Torque Wrench 16 mm, 40 - 50 Nm

Tools for IDU- ODU Cable /Connector Mounting

1 Hacksaw, fine-toothed
1 Soldering Iron, 50-150W
Solder 36/37 RMA flux core
Cloth
1 Knife
1 Flat file, fine
1 Wire brush
1 Tape rule (or caliper)
1 Heat gun, 1000W
1 Cutting pliers

for

hexagon coupling nut :


1 Wrench 1/2" (13mm)
1 Wrench 9/16" (15mm)
1 Wrench 11/16" (18mm)
1 Wrench 13/16" (21mm)

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type II Installation


2.2

Equipment external to the Radio Equipment


In addition to the necessary radio equipment & antenna the following
items are needed:

B4008 Rev. M

Coaxial cable between IDU and ODU. See Section V, chapter 5 for
advise on which cable to use.
At least two N-type connectors suitable for termination of the
selected coaxial cable.
Suitable waveguide & flanges between antenna and branching unit if
remote mount option is used.
Cable to ground the ODU.
Cable to ground the IDU.
Cable to power the IDU.
Cable to connect the PC, running the configuration & set-up program,
to the IDU.
Cable ties to secure cable runs.
Cables for user interfaces.

95

CityLink

3.0
3.1

ODU Installation
Mounting the ODU to the Pole
The ODU can be mounted to a 75mm or a 115mm pole, see figure
below.

2 x M10 NUTS AND


WASHER

U-BOLTS

Waveguide Flange type:


PDR84
SUN-SHIELD

96

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type II Installation


3.2

Cable Connections
ODU BOTTOM VIEW:
Pressure
equalizer

AGC Connector

Ground connection. Attach grounding cable (10mm2) to this point with


the M6 nut and washers.

IDU - ODU Cable Connector, N-50W


For details please see Figure V-7.

B4008 Rev. M

97

CityLink

4.0

Antenna and Waveguide Installation

4.1

0.6m Antenna

Shim Copper/
Aluminium
Copper side

Alu side

Flange Adapter
(NL2007 only)

98

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type II Installation


4.2

B4008 Rev. M

1.2m Antenna

99

CityLink
4.3

100

2m Antenna

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type II Installation


4.4

B4008 Rev. M

2.4m

101

CityLink
4.5

3m

31720

102

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation

SECTION IV
Installation of
ODU Type III and Antenna

B4008 Rev. M

103

CityLink

1.0

General
This section assumes that pre-planning of the link has been performed, i.e.
path budgeting & survey to ensure good line-of sight between the two link
ends.

1.1

Packing
Any sensitive product, i.e. IDU and Printed Circuit Boards, are packed in
special antistatic handling bags or boxes.
It is therefore essential that whenever unpacking or disassembling the
equipment and or handling printed circuit boards etc., special precautions
to avoid ESD (Electro Static Discharge) should be taken, such as using
wrist grounding or corresponding protection.
The equipment is packed in sealed plastic bags which are equipped with
required moisture protection.
All equipment is further packed in special designed cases prepared for
transportation.
Dimensions and weight of each case are specified in the "Packing
specifications" issued for the respective shipment.

1.2

Marking
Marking is done according to customers requirements. If such information is unavailable, the equipment is marked in the following way:
Customer address
Contract No.
Site Name (if known)
Case No.

1.3

Transportation
The transport containers are prepared for shipment by air, truck, railway
and sea, suitable for handling by fork-lift trucks and slings.
The cargo must be kept dry during transport and storage.
For sea-transport, deck-side shipment is not permitted and carrier-owned
cargo containers should be used.

104

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation


1.4

Radio Equipment Inventory Check


Look for damage on the cases. Ensure that correct quantities of goods have
arrived, according to the packing list in each package/unit.
Check also that the part description on the outside of each box corresponds to the components required for the installation, i.e. correct antenna
and frequency, ODU frequency band and sub-band, IDU configuration.
Report any damages or missing items to Nera ASA by e-mail or fax. A short
description of damages, preferably including photographs, should be sent
as soon as possible.

1.5

Preparation for Installation


Complete the required civil works. Transport all the equipment to site.
Unpack the equipment and inspect for damage during transit to site and
make sure that the correct quantities of goods have arrived.
Units with static discharge protection should not be unpacked until the
equipment installation takes place. Ensure you are grounded at a controlled ESD point before and during insertion, and during any subsequent
unpacking of the unit.

1.6

Handling & Storage


It is recommended that components are stored and transported to the
installation site in their original packing cases. If items are unpacked for
storage, they should be handled with care and protected during transportation by similar protective materials.
The equipment is an electronic device which should be handled with care.
It should be stored in dry, cool conditions, out of direct sunlight. A
moisture absorbing bag is taped inside the transportation unit to minimise
condensation during transportation. This is to be removed at installation.
No maintenance is required when stored according to particulars above.
To avoid damage to the sealing components and unwanted moist in the
interconnection interfaces, the transportation protection lids on the branching and the transceiver must be kept on until mounting of waveguide
components and connection of the transceiver to the branching unit.

B4008 Rev. M

105

CityLink

2.0
2.1

Installation Equipment required


Tools
The tools needed to install the equipment are listed in the following subchapters.

2.1.1

Tools for Antenna Installation and Adjustment

2.1.2

106

2 pcs Combination Wrench M8, 13 mm


2 pcs Combination Wrench M10, 16 mm
2 pcs Combination Wrench M6, 10 mm
1 pc Combination Wrench 10 mm
1 pc Torque Wrench, M16, 24 mm, 120 Nm

Tools for IDU- ODU Cable /Connector Mounting

1 Hacksaw, fine-toothed
1 Soldering Iron, 50-150W
Solder 36/37 RMA flux core
Cloth
1 Knife
1 Flat file, fine
1 Wire brush
1 Tape rule (or caliper)
1 Heat gun, 1000W
1 Cutting pliers

for

hexagon coupling nut :


1 Wrench 1/2" (13mm)
1 Wrench 9/16" (15mm)
1 Wrench 11/16" (18mm)
1 Wrench 13/16" (21mm)

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation


2.2

Equipment external to the Radio Equipment


In addition to the necessary radio equipment & antenna the following
items are needed:

B4008 Rev. M

Coaxial cable between IDU and ODU. See Section V, chapter 5 for
advise on which cable to use.
At least two N-type connectors suitable for termination of the
selected coaxial cable.
Suitable waveguide & flanges between antenna and branching unit if
remote mount option is used.
Cable to ground the ODU.
Cable to ground the IDU.
Cable to power the IDU.
Cable to connect the PC, running the configuration & set-up program,
to the IDU.
Cable ties to secure cable runs.
Cables for user interfaces.

107

CityLink

3.0
3.1

ODU / Antenna Installation, 1+0 Equipment


Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension
All the described nuts and washers are included in the antenna assembly
and come attached to the antenna.
SUSPENSION (3AB5158A)
ANTENNA
(0,3m 0,45m and 0,6m)

4ea M8 Nuts, washers


and lock washers

108

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation


3.2

Mounting the Sunshield


The Sunshield, screws, nuts and washers are found in the kit AZZ5495.

M6 Nuts, washers
and lock washers
(4ea)
SUNSHIELD
M6 Screws (4ea)

B4008 Rev. M

109

CityLink
3.3

Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Column by


using the U-bolts

U-BOLTS
(ABZ5479 for
column
diameter
115mm,
ABZ5480 for
column
diameter
75mm)

M10 Nuts, washers and lock


washers, 4ea
Torque: 25-30Nm

110

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation


3.4

Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Column by


using the Clamps

CLAMPS, 2ea
(ABZ5481)

Column diameter:
60-115mm
M10 Nuts and washers, 4ea
Torque: 35Nm

B4008 Rev. M

111

CityLink
3.5

Mounting the Transceiver


(without Antenna) to a Column
STEP 1

Mounting the Brackets on the Frame

Bracket
(Kit: ABZ5774)

4ea M8x20 screws


8ea Flat washers
4ea Lock washers
4ea M8 Nuts
(Kit:ABZ5774)

Bracket
(Kit: ABZ5774)

112

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation


STEP 2

Attaching the Frame to the Column

4ea M10 Flat washers


8ea M10 Nuts
(Kit:ABZ5774)

2ea M10 U-bolts


(Kit: ABZ5774)

B4008 Rev. M

113

CityLink
STEP 3

Mounting the Sunshields


Sunshields
(Kit: ABZ5779)

2ea M5x12 screws


8ea M5 flat washers
4ea M5 lock washers
4ea M5 nuts
(Kit: ABZ5774)

114

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation


STEP 4

Mounting the Transceiver

1+0 Configuration

1+1/HSB Configuration

B4008 Rev. M

115

CityLink
STEP 5

Mounting the Flexible Waveguide

1+0 Configuration

Mounting flange for


flexible waveguide

1+1/HSB Configuration

Mounting flange for


flexible waveguide

116

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation


3.6

Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Wall

M10 Expansion
bolts (type
dependant on
the nature of the
wall

10mm Predrilled holes


M10 Nuts and washers

B4008 Rev. M

117

CityLink
3.7

Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly


Before mounting the ODU to the antenna assembly, it is necessary to
remove the protection lid from the antenna feed. See below.

Protection lid

First remove the nuts using


a 5,5mm wrench.

Then remove the set screws


using a 1,5 mm allen key.

118

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation

After adjustment;
M16 torque = 110-120Nm
For adjustment see
Chapter 6.0.

For correct
polarisation;
see next
page

LATCHES (4ea, one


in each corner)
To unlock the latches,
push this handle forward

B4008 Rev. M

119

CityLink
Polarization
The electrical field is always orthogonal to the two opposing sides of the
two broad sides of the rectangular waveguide.
It is important to mount the ODU to the antenna with the right orientation.
The arrows on the ODU's handle shall indicate the polarisation (vertical or
horizontal).
UP

DOWN
Waveguide feed with
vertical polarisation

Waveguide feed with


horizontal polarisation

UP
POLARIZATION
POLARIZATION

POLARIZATION

POLARIZATION

DOWN
ODU orientation for
vertical polarisation

120

ODU orientation for


horizontal polarisation

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation

4.0
4.1

ODU / Antenna Installation,


HSB and 2+0 Equipment
Preparing the Suspension for HSB and 2+0 Mounting

Loosen this nut one turn.


(See also Chapter 6.0)

Bracket
Rotate the bracket 1800 by
turning this bolt CW.

B4008 Rev. M

121

CityLink
4.2

Mounting the Antenna to the Supension

4ea M8 Nuts and washers

122

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation


4.3

Mounting the Hybrid Frame to the Antenna


STEP 1
Note! Mounting sequence is important!

2ea M8 Set screws, nuts,


washers and lock washers

B4008 Rev. M

123

CityLink
STEP 2
Note! Mounting sequence is important!

M8 Screws,nuts and washers

M8 Screws,nuts and washers

124

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation


4.3

Mounting the CityLink III ODUs to the Antenna Assembly

LATCHES (1 in each
corner of each ODU)

B4008 Rev. M

125

CityLink
4.4

Mounting the Transceiver


(without Antenna) to the Column
Please refer to Chapter 3.5 (this Section).

4.5

Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Wall


Please refer to Chapter 3.6 (this Section).

126

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation

5.0

Cable Connections
ODU BOTTOM VIEW:
IDU - ODU Cable Connector, N-50W
For details please see Figure V-7.

Pressure equalizer

AGC Connector.
In a 1+1 configuation,
this connector is used
for interconnection
between the two ODUs.

B4008 Rev. M

Ground connection. Attach


grounding cable (10mm2) to
this point with the M6 nut and
washers.

127

CityLink

6.0
6.1

Antenna Alignment
Azimuth and Elevation Adjustment

Azimuth Adjustment
Torque: 110-120Nm

Unlock securing nut approx. 1 turn


before azimuth adjusting
Adjust azimuth
Lock securing nut after adjustment

Elevation Adjustment
Unlock securing nut approx. 1/2 turn
before elevation adjusting
Adjust elevation
Lock securing nut after adjustment

Torque: 110-120Nm

6.2

Coarse adjustment.
Adjust both antennas to correct direction as possible by using magnetic
compass or optical sight.

6.3

Fine adjustment
Fine adjustment is achieved by setting up a connection between the
antennas. When the connection is established a readout of the AGC voltage
can be used to align the antennas. Loosen the antenna in both elevation and
azimuth according to figure and adjust both azimuth and elevation until
maximum signal is recived. Try a few times in each direction. The antenna
should be turned so much that the first sidelobes are seen, thereby ensure
that the antenna is aligned on the mainlobe.
When the antenna is aligned in both azimuth and elevation the polarization
of the feed shall be realigned.
Finally ensure that all bolts and nuts are properly mounted and tighten.
The same procedure shall than be repeated on the opposite antenna.

128

B4008 Rev. M

ODU Type III Installation


6.4

Final Control
When all adjustments are performed, check that the input level agrees with
the calculated level. If the input level is to low, realign the antenna once
more. Finally ensure that all bolts and nuts are properly mounted and
tighten.

6.5

Polarisation alignment
Align the antenna approximately in both elevation and azimuth. Then use
a water level to align the polarisation of the antenna feed to correct
polarisation according to figures below. Loosen the six M8 nuts that are
securing the feed to the reflector and rotate the feed according to readout
of the water level. When the feed is in correct alignment, tighten the six
M8 nuts properly (do not overtight the nuts). Then the ODU can be
mounted and the antenna has to be aligned. If the antenna has to be rotated
several degrees in azimuth or elevation, the polarisation has to be realigned according to prior procedures.

Horizontal Polarisation:
When the H mark is in upwards position, this
shows that the antenna is Horizontal Polarized

Water level

Use these stud screws for aligning the feed with water level.

B4008 Rev. M

129

CityLink
Vertical Polarisation:

When the V mark is in upwards position, this


showes that the antenna are Vertical Polarised

Water level

Use these stud screws for aligning the feed with water level.

130

B4008 Rev. M

IDU Installation

SECTION V
IDU Installation

64kb/s
64kb/s
SVCE Phone
Phone
64kb/s 2Mb/s
2Mb/s SVCE
SVCE
Phone
G.703
Ext.
1 11
G.703Wayside
WaysideExt.
Ext.

POWER 1

POWER
POWER2
POWER

ODU
ODU

B4008 Rev. M

-48VDC
-48VDC
-48VDC

NI
NI
NI 111
155
Mb/s
LINE
155
Mb/s
LINE
155
Mb/s
LINE
RXDIRA

G.703
G.703

PWR
PWR1
PWR
2

RXDIRB

INP
INP OUT
OUT
64kb/s 2MHz
2MHz SVCE
SVCE10BaseT
10BaseT
2MHz
SVCE
64kb/s
64kb/s
V.11 Sync.
Sync. Ext.
Ext.
LAN
Sync.
2 2 LAN
V.11

IDU- HSB
- HSBINTFC
INTFC
IDU
IDU
INTFC

CALL
CALL
CALL

ALM&&
&AUX
AUX
ALM
ALM
AUX

LCT
LCT
LCT

NI
NI
NI 22

TXDIRA
TXDIRB

CRITICAL
CRITICAL
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MINOR
MINOR
MINOR
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING

131

CityLink

1.0

General
This section assumes that pre-planning of the link has been performed, i.e.
path budgeting & survey to ensure good line-of sight between the two link
ends.

1.1

Packing
Any sensitive product, i.e. IDU and Printed Circuit Boards, are packed in
special antistatic handling bags or boxes.
It is therefore essential that whenever unpacking or disassembling the
equipment and or handling printed circuit boards etc., special precautions
to avoid ESD (Electro Static Discharge) should be taken, such as using
wrist grounding or corresponding protection.
The equipment is packed in sealed plastic bags which are equipped with
required moisture protection.
All equipment is further packed in special designed cases prepared for
transportation.
Dimensions and weight of each case are specified in the "Packing
specifications" issued for the respective shipment.

1.2

Marking
Marking is done according to customers requirements. If such information is unavailable, the equipment is marked in the following way:
Customer address
Contract No.
Site Name (if known)
Case No.

1.3

Transportation
The transport containers are prepared for shipment by air, truck, railway
and sea, suitable for handling by fork-lift trucks and slings.
The cargo must be kept dry during transport and storage.
For sea-transport, deck-side shipment is not permitted and carrier-owned
cargo containers should be used.

132

B4008 Rev. M

IDU Installation
1.4

Radio Equipment Inventory Check


Look for damage on the cases. Ensure that correct quantities of goods have
arrived, according to the packing list in each package/unit.
Check also that the part description on the outside of each box corresponds to the components required for the installation, i.e. correct antenna
and frequency, ODU frequency band and sub-band, IDU configuration.
Report any damages or missing items to Nera ASA by e-mail or fax. A short
description of damages, preferably including photographs, should be sent
as soon as possible.

1.5

Preparation for Installation


Complete the required civil works. Transport all the equipment to site.
Unpack the equipment and inspect for damage during transit to site and
make sure that the correct quantities of goods have arrived.
Units with static discharge protection should not be unpacked until the
equipment installation takes place. Ensure you are grounded at a controlled ESD point before and during insertion, and during any subsequent
unpacking of the unit.

1.6

Handling & Storage


It is recommended that components are stored and transported to the
installation site in their original packing cases. If items are unpacked for
storage, they should be handled with care and protected during transportation by similar protective materials.
The equipment is an electronic device which should be handled with care.
It should be stored in dry, cool conditions, out of direct sunlight. A
moisture absorbing bag is taped inside the transportation unit to minimise
condensation during transportation. This is to be removed at installation.
No maintenance is required when stored according to particulars above.

B4008 Rev. M

133

CityLink

2.0
2.1.

IDU Installation
Mounting the IDU in an ANSI (19") or an ETSI Rack
Mount the relevant mechanical adapters provided in the IDU package by
using the M3-6mm TORX screws also provided in the IDU package. The
long adapters are for ETSI Rack, while the short are for ANSI Rack. See
Figure V-1.
Position the IDU in the rack and secure it by using the four M6-12mm
screws provided in the IDU package. See Figure V-2.

ANSI Rack
Adapter

ETSI Rack
Adapter

Figure V-1 Mounting the Mechanical Adapters for ANSI or ETSI Rack

64kb/s
64kb/s 2Mb/s
SVCE Phone
Phone
2Mb/s SVCE
G.703
G.703Wayside
WaysideExt.
1 1
Ext.

POWER 1

POWER
POWER2
POWER

ODU
ODU

-48VDC
-48VDC

NI
NI 11
155
Mb/s
LINE
155
Mb/s
LINE
G.703
G.703

PWR
PWR1
PWR
2

RXDIRA

CRITICAL
CRITICAL
CRITICAL

RXDIRB

MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR

INP
INP OUT
OUT
2MHz SVCE
SVCE10BaseT
10BaseT
64kb/s
64kb/s 2MHz
Sync. Ext.
V.11 Sync.
Ext.
2 2 LAN
LAN
V.11

MINOR
MINOR
MINOR

IDU
IDU- HSB
- HSBINTFC
INTFC

CALL
CALL
CALL

ALM&&AUX
AUX
ALM
ALM
AUX

LCT
LCT
LCT

NI22
NI
NI

TXDIRA
TXDIRB

WARNING
WARNING
W
ARNING

FLAT WASHER
WASHER
M6x12

Figure V-2 Mounting the IDU in a Rack


134

B4008 Rev. M

IDU Installation
2.2

Cable Installation
Route, secure if necessary with cable ties, and terminate ground cable
between the IDU safety ground post and a nearby local safety ground
point. Use the 6mm2 cable (2.5m long) included in the grounding kit.
Refer to Figures X-1 and X-2 (Section X, Appendix 1) for the IDU
safety ground post location.
Route, secure if necessary with cable ties, the terminated IDU/ODU
cable and connect to the ODU port of the IDU. See Chapter 5.0 (this
Section) for further details.
NOTE!
Max torque = 5Nm when mounting the IDU/ODU cable.
Route and secure the power cable. The CityLink requires DC power
(-40,5 to -57V) via a 2-pin connector. Refer to Figure X-7 (Section
X, Appendix 1) for a pinout of the connectors. It is recommended to
use the supplied power cable, UWMK5051. The cable is left unconnected in one end. The black conductor must be connected to 0V
(station gnd) and the blue conductor must be connected to -48V. After
connecting the cable to the power supply, measure polarity on power
connector terminals.
Dependent on the purchased configuration of the IDU, route and attach
all cables except the power cable. Refer to Section X, Appendix 1 for
wiring details.

B4008 Rev. M

135

CityLink

3.0

Hot Standby IDU Installation


(2+0 IDU installation is similar to ordinary IDU installation, see Ch. 2.0)

3.1

Mounting the Hot Standby IDUs in a Rack


Mount the relevant mechanical adapters provided in the IDU package by
using the M3-6mm TORX screws also provided in the IDU package.See
Figure V-1 (Chapter 2.1).
Position the IDUs in the rack and secure them by using the four M6-12mm
screws provided in each IDU package. See Figures V-3 & V-4.

IDU A
64kb/s
64kb/s 2Mb/s
2Mb/s SVCE
SVCE Phone
Phone
G.703
1 1
G.703Wayside
WaysideExt.
Ext.

POWER 1

POWER
POWER2
POWER

ODU
ODU

64kb/s
64kb/s 2Mb/s
2Mb/s SVCE
SVCE Phone
Phone
G.703
G.703Wayside
WaysideExt.
Ext.
1 1

POWER
POWER2
POWER

ODU
ODU

ALM&&AUX
AUX
ALM
ALM
AUX

NI22
NI
NI

LCT
LCT

TXDIRA
TXDIRB

WARNING
WARNING

NI
NI 11

RXDIRA
RXDIRB

INP
INP OUT
OUT

CRITICAL
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MAJOR
MINOR
MINOR

IDU
IDU- HSB
- HSBINTFC
INTFC

CALL
CALL

ALM
ALM&&AUX
AUX

NI
NI 22

LCT
LCT

TXDIRA
TXDIRB

WARNING
WARNING

RXDIRA

CRITICAL
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR

NI
NI
NI11
155
Mb/s
LINE
155
Mb/s
LINE
G.703
G.703

PWR
PWR1
PWR
2

RXDIRB

INP
INP OUT
OUT
SVCE10BaseT
2MHz SVCE
10BaseT
64kb/s 2MHz
64kb/s
Sync. Ext.
LAN
Ext.
2 2 LAN
V.11 Sync.
V.11

-48VDC
-48VDC

CALL
CALL
CALL

155
Mb/s
LINE
155
Mb/s
LINE

2MHz SVCE
SVCE10BaseT
10BaseT
64kb/s
64kb/s 2MHz
Sync. Ext.
Ext.
2 2 LAN
LAN
V.11
V.11 Sync.

64kb/s
64kb/s 2Mb/s
2Mb/s SVCE
SVCE Phone
Phone
G.703
WaysideExt.
Ext.
1 1
G.703Wayside

CRITICAL
CRITICAL
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MINOR
MINOR
MINOR

IDU
HSBINTFC
IDU
- -HSB
IDU
HSB
INTFC

G.703
G.703

PWR
PWR 1
2

-48VDC
-48VDC

POWER 1

RXDIRA
RXDIRB

INP
INP OUT
OUT
2MHz SVCE
SVCE10BaseT
10BaseT
64kb/s
64kb/s 2MHz
2 2 LAN
Sync. Ext.
Ext.
LAN
V.11
V.11 Sync.

-48VDC
-48VDC

POWER
POWER 2

NI
NI 111
155
Mb/s
LINE
155
Mb/s
LINE
G.703
G.703

PWR
PWR1
PWR
2

POWER 1

ODU

HSB-IDU

IDU
IDU- HSB
- HSBINTFC
INTFC

CALL
CALL

ALM
ALM&&AUX
AUX

LCT
LCT
LCT

TXDIRA
TXDIRB

NI
NI 222

MINOR
MINOR
MINOR
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING

IDU B

M6x12

FLAT WASHER
WASHER

Figure V-3 Mounting the Hot Standby IDUs in an ANSI Rack

IDU A

HSB-IDU

64kb/s 2Mb/s SVCE


G.703 Wayside Ext. 1

Phone

NI 1
155 Mb/s LINE
CRITICAL

POWER

MAJOR

PWR

MINOR
WARNING

ODU

64kb/s
V.11

-48VDC

SVCE 10BaseT
Ext. 2
LAN

64kb/s 2Mb/s SVCE


G.703 Wayside Ext. 1

POWER 1

POWER2
POWER

2MHz
Sync.

IDU - HSB INTFC

CALL

ALM & AUX

LCT

Phone

NI 2

NI 1
155 Mb/s LINE
G.703

PWR
PWR1

ODU

64kb/s
V.11

-48VDC

RXDIRA

CRITICAL

RXDIRB

MAJOR

INP OUT

MINOR

2
2MHz
Sync.

SVCE 10BaseT
Ext. 2
LAN

64kb/s 2Mb/s SVCE


G.703 Wayside Ext. 1

IDU - HSB INTFC

CALL

ALM & AUX

LCT

Phone

NI 2

TXDIRA
TXDIRB

WARNING

NI 1
155 Mb/s LINE
CRITICAL

POWER

MAJOR

PWR

MINOR
WARNING

ODU

-48VDC

64kb/s
V.11

2MHz
Sync.

SVCE 10BaseT
Ext. 2
LAN

IDU - HSB INTFC

CALL

ALM & AUX

LCT

NI 2

IDU B
FLAT WASHER
WASHER
M6x12

Figure V-4 Mounting the Hot Standby IDUs in an ETSI Rack


136

B4008 Rev. M

IDU Installation
3.2

Interconnections in a Hot Standby System


Interconnections between the IDUs in a Hot Standby system are done by
means of a Y-cable. The cabel connectors are marked respectively IDU A,
HSB-IDU and IDU B and this indicates which IDU they shall be connected
to. See Figure V-5.
Y-Cable

IDU A
HSB IDU
IDU B

Figure V-5 Interconnections in a Hot Standby System

WARNING!
If the Y-cable connectors marked with IDU A and IDU B are
swapped, the IDUs must always be rebooted after this operation.

NOTE!
Max torque = 5Nm when mounting the IDU/ODU cable.

B4008 Rev. M

137

CityLink

4.0

Installation of Optional Extension Boards


WARNING!
This equipment contains components which are sensitive to "ESD"
(Electro Static Discharge). It is therefore essential that whenever
disassembling the equipment and/or handling PC boards, special precautions to avoid ESD have to be made.
This includes personnel grounding, grounding of work bench,
grounding of tools and instruments.

Step 1
Remove the four screws that holds the lid

Step 2
Use a flat screwdriver to carefully remove the lid.

138

B4008 Rev. M

IDU Installation
Step 3
Remove screws and bushings (2ea) from the spacers and also the three
screws from the IDU front as shown below.

Step 4
Remove the blindplates from the front of the IDU.

B4008 Rev. M

139

CityLink
Step 5
Mount the extension board. Press the extension board towards the IDU's
front and push the rear edge downwards until you are able to mount the
screws and bushings in the spacers.

Step 6
Mount the new front using the three screws removed in Step 4 (only two
screws for the 21x2Mbit/s Extension Board).

Step 7
Remount the lid.

140

B4008 Rev. M

IDU Installation

5.0

IDU/ODU Cable Installation


Both ends of the cable must be terminated with N-male connectors. We
recommend to use cables with outer conductor of solid corrugated
copper.
For other cable types, the cable and all necessary installation materials must
be arranged by the purchaser.
Cable length limitations are dependent upon cable type used. The table
below show limtations for some cables. Cable lenghts include cable ties.See
Table V-1.
Cable Type

DC
resistance R

FSJ1-50A

16.3 /km

If the length is 100 m


minimum voltage to
IDU must be

If the length is 200 m


minimum voltage to
IDU must be

If the length is 300 m


minimum voltage to
IDU must be

90 m (-40.5 V)*
100 m (-40.7 V) Dev. 0.2V

Bending
radius
25 mm

200 m (-43.5 V)

See Note 1

300 m (-46.0 V)

LDF1-50
See Note 2

8,48 /km

180 m (-40.5 V)*


200 m (- 40.8 V) Deviation 0.3 V

LCF14-50J
See Note 3
LCF38-50J
See Note 4

9.6 /km

160 m (-40.5 V)*


200 m (-41.1 V) Deviation 0.6 V

75 mm
300 m (- 42.5 V)
40 / 120 mm
single / rptd
300 m (-42.9 V)

5.0 /km

50 / 95 mm
single / rptd

*) Standard (ETSI) specified minimum supply voltage to IDU is 40,5 V

Table V-1

Cable length limitation due to different DC resistance

Notes:
1. Not selected as standard stock item.
2. Standard cable kits are available as 100 m and 200 m
3. Standard cable kits are available as 100 m, 150 m and 200 m
4. Standard cable kits are available as 250 m and 300 m. Standard version of
LCF38-50 (6.7 /km) can not be used. Only the cable type LCF38-50 with solid
copper inner conductor must be used (RFS part no. 152 225 11).
IDU to ODU Coax Cable
1
2
3
4
5
6

Cable Kit 100 m LCF14-50


Cable Kit 150 m LCF14-50
Cable Kit 200 m LCF14-50
N-Connector Kit
Preparation Tool for LCF14
For cable run 200 300 m:
Cable & Connector Kit
300 m LCF38-50

Extra Connector Kit

Preparation Tool for LCF38

Table V-2

B4008 Rev. M

100 m Coax Cable including 200 Cable Ties


150 m Coax Cable including 300 Cable Ties
200 m Coax Cable including 400 Cable Ties
Connectors for IDU & ODU and Cable Grounding
Easy cable preparation for connector attachment

85W5147-100
85W5147-150
85W5147-200
87K5148-N
85W5147-TL

300 m 3/8 Coax Cable including 600 Cable Ties


and Connectors for ODU & IDU including jumper
cable and Cable Grounding Kit
Connectors for ODU & IDU including jumper cable
and Cable Grounding Kit
Easy cable preparation for connector attachment

85W5011-K300
87K5013-1A
85W5011-TL

Selected Coax Cables and Connector Kits

141

CityLink

Avoid excessive bending. Run the cable where it is reasonable well


protected and will not rub against sharp edges or overly abrasive
surfaces.
The N-connectors should be tightened to the IDU and ODU according
to the manufacturers installation instructions (provided with the
connectors) but with a max torque of 5Nm on the IDU.
Leave enough slack in the cable termination to the ODU to allow
antenna re-positioning.
The cable connection to the ODU should be made weatherproof
using the cable connector weatherproof sleeve provided in the
installation kit. See Figure V-7.

See Figure V-6 for Cable Arrangement.

142

B4008 Rev. M

IDU Installation
Antenna

ODU

Grounding point.
(See Figure V-8)

2a

NOTE 1
Weather protection kit ABZ278
(See Figure V-7)

3a
1

1a

2b

1
2c

IDU A

3c
Tower
Structure

HSB-IDU
IDU B

3b
Equipment
Earthing Bar

Buried Earthing Network

Item

Description

Part No.

Remarks

1
1a
2a
2b
2c
3a
3b
3c
4

Coax Cable
Cable Tie
Connector, N-male, straight for ODU
Connector, N-male, angle for IDU
Grounding Kit for coax cable
Grounding Cable for ODU
Grounding Cable for IDU
Grounding Jumper Cable IDU/SW
DC Power Supply Cable

See Table V-1,


-2a & -2b

Supplied as Cable Kit,


cable with ties (2 per m).

See Table V2a & -2b

Supplied as Connector Kit.

UWA7

Supplied as separate kit UWA7.

UWMK5051

Included in IDU connection kit and HSB


IDU interconnection kit.

Figure V-6

B4008 Rev. M

Cable Arrangement, Mandatory Items

143

CityLink
BOTTOM OF
BRANCHING UNIT

OUTDOOR UNIT
ODU

N - CONNECTOR
female, chassis

SEALING
75N06D-1

BOTTOM OF
BRANCHING UNIT

N - CONNECTOR
male, cable

APPLY SEALING
COMPOUND HERE

PROTECTION
SLEEVE

HOSE CLAMP
97Z6A-5
N - CONNECTOR

PROTECTION
SLEEVE
97E12A-1
HOSE CLAMP

NOTE:
(NOTE 1)
ALL CODED ITEMS ARE
INCLUDED IN KIT ABZ278

CABLE CONNECTION
1. Slide the Protection Sleeve and the Hose Clamp over the connector and onto the cable.
2. Connect the cable to the ODU. Press the protection sleeve over the connector and tighten the
connector by hand (using the sleeve gives a good hand-grip when tightening).
3. Pull the protection sleeve backwards and apply Sealing Compound (Plast 2000) onto the top end of
the sleeve. Press the sleeve upwards and over the connector until it stops into the groove around the
ODU connectors nut and washer.
4. Adjust the clamp diameter with a screwdriver and slide in the clamp between the sleeve and the
ODUs cooling ribs and place it over the connector head.Tighten the clamp with a screwdriver.

Figure V-7
144

Coax Cable Connection


B4008 Rev. M

IDU Installation
WARNING!
Do not use the Branching Unit's sealing screw for grounding
purpose.

Attach grounding cable (10mm2) to this


point with the M8 nut and washers.
Figure V-8

Branching Unit Grounding Point

WARNING!
Do not use the Branching Unit's sealing screws for grounding
purpose.

Attach grounding cable (10mm2) to this


point with the M6 nut and washers.
Figure V-9
B4008 Rev. M

Hot Standby and


2+0 DF-SP Branching Unit Grounding Point
145

CityLink

6.0

Change of Fan-Cassette
Fan cassette (if equipped) is located on the right hand side of the IDU. The
cassette may be replaced on live unit, without traffic interrupt. Withdraw old
cassette by pulling on knob on front of unit and replace with new unit.
Some combinations of circuit boards requires the use of fan-cassette in order
to control heat. In case a fan-cassette is to be installed in a unit not previously
having one, a blind front cover will have to be unscrewed and discarded
before installing a new cassette.

This page is intentionally left blank.


146

B4008 Rev. M

Preparations for Operation

SECTION VI
Preparations
for
Operation

B4008 Rev. M

147

CityLink

1.0

General
This section assumes that the radio terminal has been installed according
to the guidelines in Sections II - V.

1.1

Equipment required

1.2

Voltmeter for AGC voltage monitoring (with cable to connect to


BNC-connector)
Cable for connection between AGC monitoring point and voltmeter.

Connections
See Appendix I for a more detailed description of connectors.
Verify the following:
Correct line interface plug-in board is installed.
Cable for main traffic is connected.
Connection of IDU safety ground. Use min. 10 mm2 cable.
Coaxial cable between IDU and ODU is connected.
Cable between IDU and the PC running the configuration & set-up
program is connected. NOTE: RJ-45 modular plugs used on patch
cables etc. must mechanically comply with Federal Communications
Commission - Part 68 (FCC-68).
Optionally the following connections may be used:
ALM/AUX connector for parallel alarm inputs and outputs.
2x64kbit/s connector for 64kbit/s serial channels utilising bytes in
the Section Overhead.
NI-1 and/or NI-2 connectors for interface to other Nera equipment.
2Mbit/s WAYSIDE connectors for interface to 2Mbit/s wayside
traffic channel utilising bytes in the Section Overhead.
2MHz SYNC connectors for synchronisation purposes.
Handset and extension connectors.
LAN Interface connectors.

2.0

Power on
Apply power to the IDU by connecting the power cable. The radio link
start-up procedure and self-diagnostics will start to execute.
When power is applied to the IDU the system will perform self test, this
will take a few seconds.

148

B4008 Rev. M

Preparations for Operation


2.1

NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator Startup and


connecting to Network Elements
The NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator (Nera Element vieW-Network Management System/ -Configurator) program must be installed on a PC
satisfying the following minimum requirements:

NT4.0/Win95/Win98 operating system


Pentium 133MHz processor
32MB memory
200MB disk size
1 COM port
CD-ROM drive

Follow carefully the program installation instructions to make sure the


program is successfully installed.
The element viewer can monitor the Network Elements (NEs) using a
serial connection (RS-232) or a TCP/IP connection (or both for different
network elements). Apply all external connections to the PC before the
program is started.
A serial connection must be used the first time the network manager/
configurator is connected to the CityLink, because the IP address must be
set in the CityLink, before a TCP/IP connection can be established.

2.1.1

Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with


Serial Connection (RS-232/ LCT).
Apply the serial cable to one of the serial ports of the PC and the LCT port
of the CityLink. Start the program. A Log on dialog box pops up. Log on
to the network with your user id and password.
Note!
NEW-NMS' security system has initially one user account:
User ID:
admin
Password:
adminpasswd
It is strongly recommended to change this password!
The program has an auto discover function which automatically discovers
NEs connected to the serial ports of the PC when starting. If some NEs are
connected to the serial ports of the PC, the network topology is automatically discovered and presented in the Explorer view. Press Add to include
discovered elements in the network topology of the program. The auto
discover function can also be manually executed by selecting Discover

B4008 Rev. M

149

CityLink
from the File menu. When discovering the network manually, the program
looks for NEs at the open ports listed in the Communication dialog box
(select Communication from the Configuration menu).

2.1.2

Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with


TCP/IP Connection.
(Assumes the TCP/IP address is configured in the CityLink )
Apply Ethernet connections to both the CityLink and PC. Start the
program. A Log on dialog box pops up. Log on to the network with your
user id and password.
Note!
NEW-NMS' security system has initially one user account:
User ID:
admin
Password:
adminpasswd
It is strongly recommended to change this password!
The program does not know the IP-address of the network element so the
connection must be manually established. To configure a TCP/IP connection to the network element, select Communication from the Configuration menu. Press the Add button and type the IP address of the NE in
the address field of the dialog box which pops up. Press OK to save the
changes, and OK to close the Communication Configuration dialog box.
Select Discover from the File menu. Press Add to include discovered
elements in the network topology of the program. The accepted network
elements will be discovered and presented in the Explorer view.

2.2

Initial configuration
When the program has established contact with the CityLink, some
configurations must be set before antenna alignment can be performed.
A Configuration Wizard will guide you through the initial configurations.
Start the Wizard by selecting the network element in the Explorer view.
Then select Configuration > Wizard from the right mousebutton context
menu. Follow the Wizard instructions.
All the configuration settings are described in Section VII; Configuration.
You are now ready to proceed with antenna alignment. Please refer to
Section IV Chapter 6.0 (ODU Type I & III) or the installation manual for
the actual antenna (ODU Type II)

150

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator

SECTION VII
Configuration by
NEW Configurator

B4008 Rev. M

151

CityLink

1.0

General
This section assumes that the Preparations for Operation described in
Section VI has been performed for the complete radio link hop.
Configuration of the Network Elements is done from the Explorer View
which can be launched by selecting Explore Net from the View menu.
Configuration of Network Elements is achieved using a set of propertysheets. The property-sheets are modeless, so configuration of several
different modules can be displayed simultaneously.
To open the configuration property-sheets:
Press the Right mouse-button on the Network Element node/leaf you
want to view/change the current configurations. A dynamic menu pops up.
Open the Configuration sub-menu and select the configuration-specific
menu item.
The configuration property sheets can also be launched by selecting/
marking an NE node/leaf in the Explorer View and then selecting the
configuration-specific menu item under the Edit sub menu in the Configuration menu.
The property-sheets are divided into two categories by means of functionality:
Configuration Property sheets with Multiple Settings:
The program retrieves the current settings from the NE when the propertysheet is opened. No message is sent to the element and no data is modified
in NEWs data structure before the user presses one of the property-sheet
buttons:

Figure VII-1 Buttons on Configuration property sheets with


multiple settings

Buttons:
Get:
Set:
Close:
Help:

Retrieves the current settings from the NE.


Sends the current settings to the NE.
Closes the property-sheet without saving or setting any data
Displays help for the active property-page.

.
152

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


To change the settings:
1 Get the current settings from the NE by pressing Get.
The current NE settings are automatically retrieved when the propertysheet is opened.
2 Alter the settings.
3 Press Set to send the changes to the NE.
Configuration Property sheets with Single Interactive Settings:
The program retrieves the current NE settings when the property-sheet is
opened. Has no Get, Set or Save buttons; All functional buttons are placed
in the property-pages. A message is sent to the Network Element immediately when a control is changed or a button is pressed.
Property-sheet buttons:

Figure VII-2 Buttons on Configuration property sheets with


single interactive settings

Buttons:
Close:Closes the property-sheet.
Help: Displays help for the active property-page.
All property-pages have an information field at the bottom reflecting the
current status of the data shown in the property-page and the date and time
the property sheet data was retrieved from the network element.

Figure VII-3 Configuration property sheet information field

B4008 Rev. M

153

CityLink

2.0
2.1

Element Node
Element Id
The CityLink Element Id property sheet shows some main information
about the Network Element like name, type, serial number and different
addresses. The fields with white background can be altered by users with
proper user privileges. The gray fields are non editable.
The Element Id configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Element Id from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-4 Element ID Configuration Sheet

154

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Fields:

Description:

Serial number:
NE type:
Name:
Section address:
NE address:

The serial number of the NE. (Not editable)


The type of NE. (Not editable)
The name of the NE (max. 32 characters)
The section address of the NE. (1-254)
The NE address (1-128). Used for identification of
NEs within a section.
The Media Access Control address of the NE.
Used for OSI-Management. (Not editable)
The Network Service Access Point address of the NE.
Used for OSI-Management.
The Internet Protocol address of the NE.
This field is checked if the NE is a hot standby element.

MAC address:
NSAP address:
IP address
Hot standby:

To change the settings:


1 First, get the current settings from the NE by pressing Get.
(The settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the
property-sheet is opened.)
2 Alter the settings you want to change.
3 Press Set to send the changes to the NE.

B4008 Rev. M

155

CityLink
2.2

Available Functions
The available functions property sheet shows the functions available at the
network element. All these functions are additional CityLink functions.
The user has paid extra to get these functions. Contact your Nera equipment supplier to order functions. You will get an encrypted authentication
string in return.
The Available Functions configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view.
The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element
node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Available Functions
from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-5 Available Functions Configuration Sheet

Fields:
Automatic transmitted
power control (ATPC)
IP stack
Synchronous equipment
timing source
Simple network management
protocol (SNMP)
64 Kbit/s channels
2 Mbit/s wayside channel
Alarm auxiliary function

Description:
ATPC is a function for effectively reducing
interference probabilities..
The NE has an integrated IP stack.
Synchronous equipment timing source is
(SETS) available.
An SNMP management agent is available.
Two 64 Kbit/s channels can be inserted into
the STM-1 Section Overhead (SOH ).
One 2Mbit/s wayside channel can be inserted
into the STM-1 Section Overhead (SOH ).
A unit containing an auxiliary alarm unit
and an auxiliary output unit is available.

STM-1
156

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


2.3

Notifications
The NE can send notifications to NEW when specific events occur. When
using notifications, NEW gets new information faster than if only polling
is used. Polling should however be used in addition to notifications. The
NE keeps individual notification settings for each NEW that is logged on
to the NE, such that the settings made from one NEW only apply to that
NEW. Note that the settings will be reset to default when NEW logs on to
the NE or when the IDU is reset.
A notification is enabled when the corresponding checkbox is checked ( ).
The Notifications configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Notifications from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-6

B4008 Rev. M

Notifications Configuration Sheet

157

CityLink
Fields:

Choices:

Description:

Event s
Alarm

When checked, Alarm notifications will be


sent from the NE to the program.
Security
When checked, Security notifications will
be sent from the NE to the program.
Switching When checked, Switching notifications will
be sent from the NE to the program.

Alarm
severity
Critical

Major
Minor

Warning

158

(When the Alarm Events is disabled,


these functions are inactive)
When checked, Alarm notifications will be
sent from the NE to the program if Critical
alarms occur.
When checked, Alarm notifications will be
sent from the NE to the program if Major
alarms occur.
When checked, Alarm notifications will be
sent from the NE to the program if Minor
alarms occur.
When checked, Alarm notifications will be
sent from the NE to the program if Warnings
occur.

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


2.4

NE Clock Page
The NE Clock sheet lets you synchronize the Network Element Date/Time
with the NEW-NMS / PC Date/Time. (The NE Clock is set to the same
date/time as the PC Clock).
The NE Clock configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit NE Clock from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-7 NE Clock Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Description:

The NE's Clock:

The Date and Time retrieved from the


Network Element.
The difference between the PC clock and the
Network Element Clock.

Difference from

B4008 Rev. M

159

CityLink
2.5

Software Download
CityLink Application software can be downloaded through the NEW-NMS/
NEW-Configurator program.
The SW Download configuration can be started from the Configuration
context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit SW Download from the Configuration menu.
To download new NE application code:
1. The process of downloading starts with selecting the file containing
the application code. The file has extension: .bin. When a .bin-file is
selected, a dialog box will appear.
2. Verify that the correct version of the code file is chosen. Press Cancel
if wrong code file is chosen.
3. Press Start Download
4. Wait until the download is finished.
New application software is now downloaded at the NE. Now the NE must
start to use the new software. The new software will not start to execute
until it is activated. This is done from the SW Version property sheet.

160

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


2.6

Software Versions
The SW versions property sheet shows the software revisions and their
status. The IDU contains two application code memory banks for both the
SU (IDU) and the Transceiver (ODU). Both the IDU and the ODU use
application code from one bank, while the other bank is available for SW
download. New software can be downloaded (see Chapter 2.5 SW
Download) in the unused bank while the IDU or ODU is executing the code
of the other bank. The user may also select which bank to execute the
application from if both banks contain valid software.
The ODU contains an application code software bank in addition to the two
banks in the IDU. The ODU software is copied from the active IDU bank
to the ODU bank during the ODU boot process.
The SW Versions configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit SW Versions from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-8 SW Version Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

161

CityLink
Fields:

Description:

SW Component
Bank
Revision
Status

Name of the software


Software location
Software revision
Idle:Software is not being executed.
Active:Software is being executed.
Loading: SW is downloading to this bank.
Invalid: Incomplete or invalid SW; SW bank
has not been used or a SW download has
failed.
Not contact with unit: The IDU does not
have contact with the unit containing this SW.

To activate a memory bank:


1 Select the unused bank (status: Idle) by clicking the left mouse button.
2 Press the Set Active button
The NE will be reset and when it starts, the application code of the chosen
bank will be executed.

162

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator

3.0

Transmission Node

3.1

Transmission Configuration (Section Termination)

3.1.1

Section Termination, SW-version < R2A00


The CityLink Section Termination sheet shows the channel configuration
of the network element. For CityLink systems, the number of the different
channel settings is fixed. Only the Channel Termination can be changed.
The Section Termination configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Transmission node in the Explorer
view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the
Transmission node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Section
Termination from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-9 Section Termination Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Description:

Regular channels:
Protection channels:
Regular co. channels:
Protection co. channels:
Channels:
Channel
Termination

The Number of Regular Channels.


The Number of Protection Channels.
The Number of Regular Co. Channels.
The Number of Protection Co. Channels.
List of NE Channels with the channel properties.
Name of the channel.
MS (Multiplexer section) or RS (Regenerator Section) (Double-click the field to edit).
The MS and RS are parts of the STM-1 Section
overhead. Together MS and RS form the total SOH.

To change the settings:


1. Get the current settings from the NE by pressing Get.
2. Alter the settings you want to change. To change the Termination
settings, double-click in the appropriate cell in the list. A Combo-box
where you can select RS or MS is then displayed
3. Press Set to send the changes to the NE.
B4008 Rev. M

163

CityLink
3.1.2

Transmission Configuration, SW-version R2A00


The Transmission Configuration sheet is used to set the transmission
standard and termination on the element. When the applied termination is
different from RST, the sheet is also used to configure the SETS functionality.
A CityLink element may support different extension boards. This includes
the DS3/E3 Extension Board, the STM-1 Extension Board or the 21x2Mbit/
s tributary board. Each element will, however, only support one extension
board at a time. From the Transmission Configuration sheet the user can
enable the functionality of the specific extension board. The 21x2Mbit/s
extension board assumes a frame structure which contains 63 E1s. To enable
this board, select the termination to be Lower Order Path Termination LOPT. If the DS3/E3 Extension Board or the STM-1 Extension Board is
mounted, the frame structure must be set explicitly.
The Transmission Configuration configuration sheet can be opened from
the Configuration context menu of the Transmission node in the Explorer
view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Transmission node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Transmission
Configuration from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-10 Section Termination Configuration Sheet

164

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Fields:

Description:

Termination Enabling The type of termination this element shall


support. Legal values are:
RST
MST
Lower Order Path Termination - LOPT
Enable X-Connect (available only if XConnect Extension Board is equipped)
Enable DS3/E3 (available only if DS3/E3
Extension Board is equipped)
Note: If this setting is changed and applied to
the element, the equipment will perform a software reset.
Transmission Standard The Transmission System used. Legal values are:
SDH
SONET
Element Type

The type of timing element were supposed to


be. This is important in a network where SETS is
applied. Legal values are:

SEC

SSU Local (G.812 Local)

SSU Transit (G812 Transit)

PRC

SSU Clock Source

This field will only be enabled whenever the


Element Type is set to either SSU (G.812
Local) or SSU (G.812 Transit). The SSU is an
external clock regenerator or filter that will
remove jitter from
the clock on its input. It will
then output a regenerated clock on its
output.
The SSU is connected to the element via the
2MHz synch RJ-45 plug on the front of the IDU.
The clock source can be one of the following:

LINE

RADIO

Any dropped 2Mbit/s

LINE EXT
The last option will only be available if the XConnect Extension Board is present.

B4008 Rev. M

165

CityLink

166

SSU Squelch Level

This field will only be enabled whenever the


Element Type is set to either SSU (G.812 Local) or
SSU (G.812 Transit). If the quality of the clock source
changes to a quality that is below this quality
squelch level, the 2MHz synch output to the SSU
will be squelched. This in turn will cause the SSU to
enter holdover mode (or free-running), i.e. the clock
quality it sends to the 2MHz synch input will have a
G.812 quality (ref. ITU-T Recommendation G.812)
that is based upon the internal oscillator in the SSU.
Legal squelch levels are:

Better or equal G.813

Better or equal G.812 Local

Better or equal G.812 Transit

Equal G.811

Clock Priority

This is the first column in the Clock Priority list view.


This field will only be enabled whenever the Element
Type is set to SEC. This is just a number specifying
the priority of the rows where 1 is the higher priority.
The user can not change anything in this column.

Clock Source

This is the second column in the Clock Priority list


view. This field will only be enabled whenever the
Element Type is set to SEC. If e.g. the user double
clicks the first cell in this column, a combobox will be
shown over the cell. The user can than select from
where the clock to this priority list item shall be taken.
This can also be done for the 2nd and 3rd cell in this
column. The 4th cell, on the other hand, is the internal
oscillator which will be used whenever the element is
in holdover mode. This cell cant be altered. Legal
values are:

LINE

RADIO

2MHz Synch

LINE EXT
Note: Only one of the priority list items can be
configured to take its clock source from a 2Mbit/s
tributary at the time. This is due to HW constraints.

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Clock Quality This is the third column in the Clock Priority list view. This
field will only be enabled whenever the Element Type is set
to SEC. If the Clock Source field for a specific priority list
item is set to either STM-1 LINE or STM-1 RADIO, the
corresponding cell in this column will be set to SSM and
will be grayed out (i.e. disabled). This means that the content
of the S1-byte (located in the MSOH) will inform the element
of which clock quality the traffic in the specific directions is
clocked with. If the Clock Source field for a specific priority
list item is set to be taken from the 2MHz Synch input, or it
is to be taken from a 2Mbit/s tributary, their clock quality
arent embedded in the traffic in any way. This means
that the user will have to set their clock qualities manually.
In these cases, the cell in question in this column will be
enabled and the user can set the quality. Legal values are:
G.813
G.812 Local
G.812 Transit
G.811
In addition to these, SSM will also be present in the list but
can not be selected.
Note: Ref. ITU-T for more information regarding the
different G.8xx recommendations.
Enabled

This is the fourth column in the Clock Priority list view.


This field will only be enabled whenever the Element Type
is set to SEC. If a specific priority list item has this cell
checked it will be present in the clock priority scheme. If
not it is ignored.

Active Priority This is the fifth column in the Clock Priority list view. This
field presents the currently active clock. The field is
updated each time the GET button is pressed.
Note: If the user, by means of the Drop or Continue dialog, removes any of
the tributaries in the list above, they will automatically be removed from
the list!

Buttons:
SSM Dialog:

B4008 Rev. M

This button will only be visible when the in user level of the
logged in user is equal to or greater than Administrator. It
will spawn a new dialog that will poll for the SSM in both
radio- and line direction of the STM-1 traffic.
167

CityLink
Get:

Click this button to retrieve the current settings from the


NE. Any modifications done to the GUI elements will be
lost and the dirty token will be removed.
Set:
Click this button to send the settings to the NE. Any
modifications done to the GUI elements will be applied
the NE and the dirty token will be removed.
Close:
Click this button to close the property sheet.
Help:
Press this button to get help on the current property sheet.
For help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box,
then click the item.
A brief description of the different terminations:
RST:
This is the default setting on the element when delivered from the factory.
With this configuration the SDH structure is ignored, i.e. it can be anything
because the virtual containers will not be accessed. The equipment will
monitor and re-generate B1 pulses. M1 REI and B2 will only be monitored.
Figure VII-11 shows the Transmission Configuration dialog when this
setting is applied.
Note: When the element is RST, all the SETS elements of the dialog are
disabled. This is because SETS only is used when the element is configured
as MST or Lower Order Path Termination - LOPT. Even though the SETS
functionality is disabled, the user can see the last applied MST settings.

Figure VII-11 Transmission Configuration, RST


168

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


MST:
With this configuration the SDH structure is ignored, i.e. it can be anything
because the virtual containers will not be accessed. The equipment will
monitor and regenerate B1-, M1 REI- and B2-pulses. Figure VII-12 shows
how the dialog looks when this setting is applied.

Figure VII-12 Transmission Configuration, MST


Lower Order Path Termination - LOPT:
With this configuration the SDH structure is assumed to have a VC-12
mapping and the the equipment will monitor and regenerate B1, M1 REI, B2
and BIP-2 pulses. Figure VII-13 shows how the dialog looks when this setting
is applied.

Figure VII-13 Transmission Configuration, LOPT


B4008 Rev. M

169

CityLink
Enable X-Connect:
To enable the X-Connect functionality, select Enable X-Connect from the
Termination enabling combo box and press the SET button. The SDH
structure may be configured from the Frame Structure page.

Figure VII-14 Transmission Configuration, Enable X-Connect


Enable DS3/E3:
To enable the DS3/E3 functionality, select Enable DS3/E3 from the
Termination enabling combo box and press the SET button. The SDH
structure may be configured from the Frame Structure page.

Figure VII-15 Transmission Configuration, Enable DS3/E3


170

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Enable 21x2:
This functionality is only available with new target software. To enable the
21x2 functionality, select Enable 21x2 from the Termination enabling
combo box and press the SET button. The SDH structure may be configured from the Frame Structure page.

Figure VII-16 Transmission Configuration, Enable 21x2

B4008 Rev. M

171

CityLink
3.1.3

SSM - Synchronization Status Message


The SSM sheet is used to monitor the received S1-byte in the two STM1 directions; LINE and RADIO.
The SSM - Synchronization Status Message configuration sheet can be
opened from the Section Termination sheet by clicking the SSM Dialog
button on this sheet.
Note: The SSM Dialog button will only be visible for Administrator
users in the Section Termination sheet.

Figure VII-17 The SSM Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Description:

Direction

From which STM-1 direction the S1 byte is monitored.


This can be either Line or Radio
Will show the last time the specific S1 byte changed its
value.
The current content of the specific S1 byte.
A human readable interpretation of the S1 byte. These can
be:

Last change
S1 byte
Description

172

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


S1 byte
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111

3.2

SDH synchronization quality level description


Quality unknown (existing sync network)
Reserved
G.811
Reserved
G.812 transit
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
G.812 local
Reserved
Reserved
Synchronous equipment timing source (SETS)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Do not use for synchronization

Alarm Indication Signal Insert


(For advanced users)
The Path Trace functionality and the AIS (Alarm Indicator Signal) functionality are used for verifying that the received STM-1 frames are the frames we
want to receive (correct routing, frequency alignment...). This is done by
either inserting a fixed byte or a user defined ASCII string in the J0 slot in the
RSOH, or a two bit RF ID symbol at the transmit end. This is done from the
path trace sheet. The RF ID functionality is only available at the Radio side.
The radio that receives the STM-1 frames must have the same Trace string
(J0) or RF ID defined in the AIS insert sheet. If there is a mismatch, an AIS
can be inserted. An AIS can also be inserted if the HBER threshold is
exceeded.
The AIS Insert configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of both the Transmission Radio and Line Rx nodes in the
Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting)
one of the Transmission Radio and Line Rx nodes in the Explorer view
and then selecting Edit AIS Insert from the Configuration menu.

B4008 Rev. M

173

CityLink

Figure VII-18 AIS Insert Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Insert AIS when


Viterbi HBER
threshold exceeded

An AIS is inserted when the Viterbi HBER


threshold is exceeded. (See Chapter 4.4.9
for setting of BER threshold.)

Insert AIS when


trace mismatch

An AIS is inserted when there is a mismatch


between the Trace String set in the Path Trace
sheet and Trace String set on this sheet.

Insert AIS when


RF ID mismatch

An AIS is inserted when there is a mismatch


between the RF ID set in the Path Trace
sheet and RF ID bit set on this sheet.
The RF ID functionality is only available at
the Radio node.

AIS remove delay

1 - 200 seconds

Regenerator
section
trace (J0)

174

Subfields: Description:

Not used

The Regenerator Section Trace String is not


used.
Fixed byte The Regenerator Section Trace String is one
byte ( =8 bit) long.
B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Fields: Subfields:

Description:

User message The Regenerator Section Trace String is a user de(ASCII)


fined message ASCII (sixteen bytes =128bits long)
Expected:
The ASCII string or fixed byte to be compared with
received J0 in RSOH. If mismatch, AIS will be
inserted if the Insert AIS when trace mismatch
box is checked. The Expected field normally contains the same values as the Trace string in the Path
trace property sheet at the transmit end of the path.
Received:
The ASCII string or fixed byte in received J0 in
RSOH.
Status:
The status of the Regenerator Section Trace:
OK: Expected and received Regenerator
Section Trace are identical.
RS-TIM alarm: (Regenerator Section Trace
Identifier Mismatch) Mismath between
expected and received RS Trace.
LOF error: Loss of frame alarm on received
STM-1 signal. Thus, J0 is not available. Alarm
status, OK or RS-TIM alarm will be latched.
CRC error: CRC error in received Regenerator
Section Trace. (Only in User Message mode)
Invalid: Not valid User Message received.
RF ID:

B4008 Rev. M

(The RF ID functionality is only available at the


Radio node)
Not used/Used: RF_ID MS3 bit on/off
Expected:
The value to be compared with the RF ID byte in
the received SOH. If mismatch, AIS will be inserted if the Insert AIS when RF ID mismatch
box is checked. The Expected field normally
contains the same values as the RF ID value in the
Path Trace property sheet at the transmit end of
the path.
Received:
The received RF ID value.
Status:
The status of the RF ID:
OK: Expected and received RF ID values are
identical.
RF-ID alarm: Mismatch between expected and
received RF ID values.
Invalid: Not valid RF ID value received.
175

CityLink
3.3

Path Trace
(For advanced users)
The Path Trace functionality and the AIS (Alarm Indicator Signal) functionality are used to test that the received STM-1 frames are the frames we want
to receive (correct routing, frequency alignment. . . . ). This is done by either
inserting a fixed byte or an user defined ASCII sting in the J0 slot in the RSOH,
or a two bit RF ID symbol at the transmit end. This is done from the path trace
sheet. The RF ID functionality is only available at the Radio side. The radio
that receives the STM-1 frames must have the same Trace string (J0) or RF
ID defined in the AIS insert sheet. If there is a mismatch, an AIS can be
inserted. An AIS can also be inserted if the HBER threshold is exceeded.
The Path Trace configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of both the Transmission Radio and Line Tx nodes in the
Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the
one of the Transmission Radio and Line Tx nodes in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit Path Trace from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-19 Path Trace Configuration Sheet

176

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Fields:

Subfields

Description:

Regenerator section
trace string
Enabled

When checked the specific Trace


String is sent in the J0 byte.
Fixed byte
The Regenerator Section Trace
String is one byte ( =8bit) long.
User message The Regenerator Section Trace
(ASCII)
String is a user defined message
ASCII (sixteen bytes =128bits long)
Trace string Specifies the data (Fixed byte or
User Message) to be inserted into
the J0 byte.
RF ID
Not used/Used RF_ID MS3 bit on/off
Two bit combination.

B4008 Rev. M

177

CityLink

4.0
4.1

Equipment Node
Network Routing
The active and initial routing tables map incoming messages that are
addressed to other NEs, to different communication ports.
The active routing table is used by the IDU to route messages to other NEs,
using the best path detected. The IDU regularly searches for connected
NEs through all enabled communication ports to detect any changes in the
network topology. This table is initialised with the initial routing entries
when the IDU is rebooted (and when the initial routing table is configured
by the user) and then evolves towards an optimal routing table.
The initial routing table is used after the IDU has been booted. This table
is used as a starting point for the routing mechanism, and will thus, if
properly set, decrease the time the NE uses to create a sufficient active
routing table. Initial routing entries can be manually added and active
routing entries can be copied to the initial table.
The Routing Table configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node
in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Routing Table from the
Configuration menu.

178

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator

Figure VII-20 Routing Table Configuration Sheet,


Active Tab (top) and Initial Tab (bottom)

B4008 Rev. M

179

CityLink
Fields:

Description:

Auto/Manual

If Auto, the router may update the entry in the active


routing table automatically based on shortest path/
lowest weight. If Manual, the entry is never changed by
the router and fixed route configuration is used.
The Section number of the addressed NE (1-128).
The NE address of the destination NE. If this number is
255, section routing is used. That means that this routing
entry is used for all NEs in the specified section.
Possible values: 1...62 (and broadcast address 255).
The communication port of which the messages are to be
routed through. Possible values:
NI1
NI2
DCC Line
DCC Radio
OSI TP4 tunnel 1 (Server)
OSI TP4 tunnel 2 (Server)
OSI TP4 tunnel 1 (Client)
OSI TP4 tunnel 2 (Client)
TCP/IP tunnel 1 (Server)
TCP/IP tunnel 2 (Server)
TCP/IP tunnel 1 (Client)
TCP/IP tunnel 2 (Client)
A computed weight that gives an indication of the
communication capacity to the destination network
element. A high number denotes a longer response time.

Section
NE

Port

Weight

Buttons:
Add:

Displays the Add Routing Entry dialog box where a new


initial routing entry can be configured.
Edit:
Displays the Edit Routing Entry dialog box where the
selected initial routing entry can be configured.
Delete:
Deletes the selected routing entries.
Add to static: Copies the selected routing entries to the initial routing
table.

180

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.2

IP Routing
Static Routes
Maximum 20 static routes can be configured on a Nera OSPF router.
Active Routes
An Nera OSPF router supports approximately 200 active routes.
OSPF areas
It is not recomended to have more than 25 OSPF routers per OSPF area.
Each area may export up to 8 address ranges.
Fixed configuration options
The Nera OSPF implementation is not a dedicated router implementation and
as such some parameters that would normally be configurable are fixed. For
interoperability with other equipment it is however sometimes important that
the configuration of external equipment match these values.
Name
Inject default route into stub area
Router dead interval
Hello interval
Retransmit delay
Retransmit interval
Authentication

Value
YES
40 sec
10 sec
1 sec
5 sec
NO

Limitations
This implementation supports a basic implementation of OSPF v.2 (RFC
2823). It does not support virtual links and MD5 authentication.
Other options
This implementation supports a rudimentary mechanism for distribution of
static and RIP2 routes. The implementation also supports exporting routes
to RIP2.

B4008 Rev. M

181

CityLink
4.2.1

General Settings
The general settings page allows the user to control the general use of the
OSPF and RIP 2 protocols for the selected NE. Enabling of protocols on
specific interfaces are performed in the Rip Interfaces and OSPF Interfaces
property pages.

Figure VII-21 IP Routing Configuration Sheet,General Settings

182

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Property page controls:
OSPF Protocol: Select parameter settings for OSPF routing protocol.
Enable:
Enables the NE to handle OSPF routing.
Redistribute RIP: Allows OSPF to redistribute routing
information from RIP v2 routing
protocol.
Redistribute Static: Allows OSPF to redistribute static
routing information.
Default Cost:
Setting of default cost value used for
OSPF protocol.
The Redistribute options allow the OSPF protocol to pass
the routing information of other routing protocols.
For information to be passed between the OSPF and RIP
protocols, the current NE must have both protocols enabled.
RIP Protocol:

Select parameter settings for RIP routing protocol.


Enable:
Enables the NE to handle RIP routing.
Redistribute OSPF: Allows RIP to redistribute routing information from OSPF routing protocol.
Redistribute Static: Allows RIP to redistribute static routing
information.
Default Metric:
Setting of default metric value used for
RIP protocol.
The Redistribute options allow the RIP protocol to pass the
routing information of other routing protocols.
For information to be passed between the OSPF and RIP
protocols, the current NE must have both protocols enabled.

IP Configurable List of interfaces available on the current NE for the OSPF


Interfaces:
and RIP protocols (IP enabled interfaces).
Interfaces may be enabled for IP in the Communication Ports
page for the specific interface (e.g. NI interface on CityLink).

B4008 Rev. M

183

CityLink
4.2.2

Active Routes
Monitor active routes for current NE from this page.

Figure VII-22 IP Routing Configuration Sheet, Active Routes

184

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.2.3

Static Routes
Edit static routes regarding IP Routing using this page.

Figure VII-23

IP Routing Configuration Sheet, Static Routes

Property page controls:


Add:
Edit:

Add a new static route to the list using the appearing dialog.
Select a row and press Edit to open the Edit Static Route dialog.
In this dialog the settings for the selected route may be changed.
Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list.
Note! Changes to the Static Routes are not transferred to the NE before Set
is pressed.

B4008 Rev. M

185

CityLink
4.2.4

RIP Interfaces
Edit RIP Interfaces for current NE from this page.
Note!
In order to edit the RIP areas settings, the RIP protocol must be disabled
in the General Settings page.

Figure VII-24

IP Routing Configuration Sheet, RIP Interfaces

Property page controls:


Add:
Edit:

Add a new RIP interface to the list using the appearing dialog.
Select a row and press Edit to open the Edit RIP Interface dialog.
In this dialog the settings for the selected interface may be
changed.
Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list.
Note! Changes to the RIP Interfaces are not transferred to the NE before Set
is pressed.

186

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.2.5

OSPF Interfaces
Edit OSPF Interfaces for current NE from this page.
Note!
In order to edit the OSPF Interfaces settings, the OSPF protocol must be
disabled in the General Settings page.

Figure VII-25

IP Routing Configuration Sheet, OSPF Interfaces

Property page controls:


Add:
Edit:

Add a new OSPF interface to the list using the appearing dialog.
Select a row and press Edit to open the Edit OSPF Interface
dialog. In this dialog the settings for the selected interface may be
changed.
Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list.
Note! Changes to the OSPF Interfaces are not transferred to the NE before
Set is pressed.

B4008 Rev. M

187

CityLink
4.2.6

OSPF Areas
Edit settings for OSPF areas for current NE from this page.
Note!
In order to edit the OSPF Areas settings, the OSPF protocol must be
disabled in the General Settings page.

Figure VII-26

IP Routing Configuration Sheet, OSPF Interfaces

Property page controls:


Add:

Add a new OSPF area to the list using the appearing dialog.
Note! Use Edit dialog to add new network ranges to existing areas.
Edit:
Select a row and press Edit to open the Edit OSPF Area dialog.
In this dialog the settings for the area which the row belongs to may
be changed.
Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list.
If a network range row is selected, only the network range is deleted.
In all other cases, the entire area is deleted.
Note! Changes to the OSPF areas are not transferred to the NE before Set
is pressed.

188

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.3
4.3.1

Communication Ports
DCC (Data Communication Channel)
The CityLink DCC (Data Communication Channel) is used to communicate
between the Supervisory Unit of the Network Element and Supervisory Units
of other Network Elements through the SOH of the STM-1 traffic.
There are two DCC ports. DCC Line at the line side and DCC Radio at the radio
side. The DCC Radio is always enabled. Nera Stack will always be enabled
at DCC Radio.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the DCC tab to view/change the DCC settings. The sheet can also
be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit
Communication Ports from the
Configuration menu.

Fields:

Choices:

Description:

Figure VII-27 DCC Tab in Communication Ports Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

189

CityLink
Enabled
Channel:
Ch. 1-Ch XX

Switches the DCC communication ports


on/off.
The Channel where the DCC are
inserted in the SOH.
CityLink has only one channel. This
field will always be Ch. 1 at CityLink.

Direction
Line
Radio
Timeslot:

DCC Line is inserted the line side of the


radio.
DCC Radio is inserted the radio side of
the radio.
Shows which timeslot in the SOH the
DCC channels use. The user can change
the used timeslot by pressing SOH. The
SDH Frame Section Overhead Dialog
box will appear.

Stack
Nera

QECC
TCP/IP
LAPD

Network side
User side
PPP:

Active mode
Demand dial
Direct mode
Passive mode

190

NERA Stack.
Nera stack is always enabled on the
radio side (DCC Radio).
QECC Stack
TCP/IP Stack
Data link layer for the QECC protocol.
For more information refer to ITU-T
G.784 and ITU-T Q.921.
Server for the LAPD requests.
Client for the LAPD requests.
(Point to Point Protocol) Data link
layer for the TCP/IP protocol.
(currently not implemented)
(currently not implemented)
(currently not implemented)
(currently not implemented)
(currently not implemented)

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.3.2

NI (Network Interface)
The CityLink NI (Network Interface) ports (NI-1 and NI-2) are used to connect
the Supervisory Unit of the Network Element to Supervisory Units of other
Network Elements. The NI ports on the front panel of the CityLink IDU are
used to connect the Network Elements. The NI ports can be set to a variety
of different configurations.
The NI 2 port, in the CityLink Radio, can be Enabled only if the Ethernet
function is Disabled, and vice versa.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the NI tab to view/change the NI settings. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit Communication Ports from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-28 NI Tab in Communication Ports Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

191

CityLink
Fields:
Enabled
Function

Choices:
CityLink
NL29x NI
NL29x Qx
PDH Synchronous
PDH Asynchronous
V.11 contra dir master
V.11 contra dir slave
V.11 co dir
Q1 V.11
NL29x V.11 contra
dir slave

Baudrate

1200 to 200000

Description:
Enables the NI port
The functionality of the NI port.
The baud rate and stack are
grayed/whitened to indicate which
settings are necessary for the
different functionalities.

The baud rate (symbols pr. second)


of the NI port. If the field is grayed,
no baud rate is necessary to set.
Baud

Stack
Nera
OSI
LAPD

Network side
User side
PPP:

Active mode
Demand dial
Direct mode
Passive mode

192

NERA Stack.
OSI Stack
Data link layer for the QECC
protocol. For more information
refer to ITU-T G.784 and ITU-T
Q.921.
Server for the LAPD requests.
Client for the LAPD requests.
(Point to Point Protocol) Data link
layer for the TCP/IP protocol.
(currently not implemented)
(currently not implemented)
(currently not implemented)
(currently not implemented)
(currently not implemented)

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.3.3

LCT
The LCT port is the serial port (RS-232) that can be used to communicate with
a PC executing NEW-NMS. In this sheet the baud rate of the LCT port can
be changed.
WARNING!
If you are communicating with the NE through the LCT (Serial) port and you
change the LCT baud rate you will loose contact with the NE until you
configure the NEW-NMS communication settings to the same baud rate
as the NE baud rate.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the LCT tab to view/change the LCT settings. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit Communication Ports from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-29 LCT Tab in Communication Ports Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

Fields:

Choices:

Description:

Baudrate:

1200 - 115200

Baudrate. The default baudrate is 115200.

193

CityLink
4.3.4

Ethernet
In the CityLink Radio the Ethernet port can be Enabled only if the NI 2 port
is Disabled, and vice versa. See chapter 4.3.2.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the Ethernet tab to view/change the Ethernet settings. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Communication Ports from the
Configuration menu.

Figure VII-30 Ethernet Tab in Communication Ports Configuration Sheet

194

Fields:

Choices:

Enabled
Stack

Description:

Toggles Ethernet on/off


OSI TP4
OSI Stack
TCP/IP
TCP/IP Stack. Must be selected if IP
Tunneling is enabled.

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.3.5

IP Settings
The IP Settings sheet lets you view the IP address of the NE and configure
the subnet mask and default gateway. The IP address can be set in the
Element Id property sheet.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the IP Settings tab to view/change the NI settings. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Communication Ports from the
Configuration menu.

Figure VII-31 IP Settings Tab in Communication Ports Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Description:

IP address
Subnet mask

Shows the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the NE.


Type the Subnet Mask number obtained from your
network administrator. This number, combined with
the IP address, identifies which network your NE is on.
For each adapter, type the correct IP address of the
default gateway used for forwarding packets to other
networks or subnets. This address should be provided
by the network administrator and is required for nodes
on internetworks. If this is not provided, IP functionality
will be limited to the local subnet unless a route is
specified with the TCP/IP route command.

Default gateway

B4008 Rev. M

195

CityLink
4.3.6

IP Tunneling
A connection can be set up between two NEs through another network,
using the Internet Protocol. This is called IP Tunneling. Two connections,
IP Tunnel 1 and IP Tunnel 2, can be configured. Ethernet must be enabled
with TCP/IP Stack in order to use IP tunnels. Internet Protocol (IP)address, Section address and NE address are used for set up of IP tunnels
to other NEs. The IP tunnel must only be set up at one side of the tunnel.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the IP Tunneling tab to view/change the IP Tunneling settings. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node
in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Communication Ports
from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-32 IP Tunneling Tab in Comm. Ports Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Choices: Description:

Enabled
On/Off
Toggles IP Tunneling on/off.
Remote section address The section address of the NE addressed
through the IP tunnel.
Remote NE address
The NE address of the NE addressed
through the IP tunnel.
Remote IP address
The Internet Protocol (IP) address of
the NE addressed through the IP tunnel.
196

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.3.7

OSI TP4 Tunneling


A connection can be set up between two NEs through another network,
using the OSI protocol. This is called OSI Tunneling. Two connections,
OSI TP4 Tunnel 1 and OSI TP4 Tunnel 2, can be configured. Ethernet must
be enabled with OSI Stack in order to use OSI TP4 Tunneling.
Network Service Access Point (NSAP)- address, Section address and NE
address are used for set up of IP tunnels to other NEs.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the OSI TP4 Tunneling tab to view/change the OSI TP4 Tunneling
settings. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the
Equipment node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Communication Ports from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-33 OSI TP4 Tunneling Tab in Comm. Ports Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Choices: Description:

Enabled:
On/Off
Remote section address:
Remote NE address:
Remote NSAP address:
B4008 Rev. M

Toggles OSI Tunneling on/off


Shows the section address of the NE
addressed though OSI TP4 Tunnel
Shows the SU address of the NE
addressed though OSI TP4 Tunnel
0 to 20 bytes
197

CityLink
4.4

Looping
The loop settings are divided into five categories: Main traffic looping,
2Mbit/s Wayside traffic looping, 64kbit/s looping, 21x2Mbit/s looping and
DS3/E3 looping.

4.4.1

Main Looping
The Looping configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. Press the
Main tab to view/change the Main looping settings. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit Looping from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-34 Looping Configuration Sheet

198

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Fields:

Description:

Loop buttons:

One button for each loop where the arrow indicates


which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop
arrows describes the status of the loop:
Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message
has just been sent to the NE and the GUI (Graphical User
Interface) is waiting for a response from the NE. (The
loop settings have not been confirmed by the NE). Note
that the loop cannot be toggled when the status is unknown.
Black: The loop is off (inactive)
Red: The loop is on (active)
Displays the time of which all main traffic loops in the NE
will be cleared. This time is set by the user when activating
a loop.

Loops will be
automatically
cleared after:

The different main traffic loops (from left to right in Figure 34):
4. SORP, LT output to LR input loop, far-end (IDU)
1. SORP LR output to LT input loop, near-end (IDU)
14. IF loop, near-end (IDU)
15. IF loop, near-end (ODU)
16. RF loop, near-end (ODU)

Buttons:
Close: Closes the property sheet.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet page. For
help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then click the item.

B4008 Rev. M

199

CityLink
4.4.2

64 Kbit/s Looping
The Looping configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. Press the 64
Kbit/s Looping tab to view/change the looping settings. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting the Equipment node in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit
Looping from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-35 Looping Configuration Sheet. 64kbit/s Tab

200

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Fields:
Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates
which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop
arrows describes the status of the loop:
Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has yet not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop
message has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is
waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop settings
have not yet been confirmed by the NE). Note that the
loop cannot be toggled when the status is unknown.
Black: The loop is off (inactive)
Red: The loop is on (active)
Grey: The corresponding 64kbit/s channel is not enabled.
The different 64Kbit/s loops: (Figure VII-35 describes the loops)
40. 64Kbit/s G.703 (near end)
41. 64Kbit/s G.703 (far end)
42. 64Kbit/s V.11 (near end)
43. 64Kbit/s V.11 (far end)

Buttons:
Close: Closes the property sheet.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet page. For
help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then click the item.

B4008 Rev. M

201

CityLink
4.4.3

2 Mbit/s Wayside Looping


The Looping configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. Press the 2
Mbit/s Wayside tab to view/change the looping settings. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Looping from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-36 Looping Configuration Sheet, Wayside Tab

202

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Fields:
Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates
which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop
arrows describes the status of the loop:
Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has yet not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop
message has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is
waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop settings
have not yet been confirmed by the NE). Note that the
loop cannot be toggled when the status is unknown.
Black: The loop is off (inactive)
Red: The loop is on (active)
Grey: The corresponding 2Mbit/s channel is not enabled.
The different wayside loops: (Figure VII-36 describes the loops)
30. Wayside near end loop.
32. Wayside far end loop.

B4008 Rev. M

203

CityLink
PRBS Settings:
PRBS Generator:

PRBS Check:

Generates a PRBS signal that can be inserted into the


transmit direction of the wayside channel.
Arrow buttons: Press a button to insert the PRBS
signal from the generator to the wayside channel.
There is one button for normal PRBS insert and one
button for inverted PRBS insert. Red=enabled,
black=disabled, blue=unknown status,
grey=wayside disabled.
Counts PRBS errors (An error is detected when the
signal differs from the expected PRBS signal).
Errors can be counted at the receive direction of the
wayside channel.
Arrow buttons: Press a button to enable the error
detection for the desired traffic direction. There is
one button for normal PRBS check and one button
for inverted PRBS check. Red=enabled,
black=disabled, blue=unknown status,
grey=wayside disabled.
Count: The total number of deviations detected
between the received signal and expected PRBS
signal.
Rate: The number of deviations detected between
the received signal and expected PRBS signal per
second.
Reset button. Resets the cumulative counter.
Status:
OK: Error check is valid.
2Mbit/s Wayside disabled: Wayside channel
is not enabled (See the 2Mbit/s Wayside property
sheet).
Counter overflow: The error check is not valid
because the counter has exceeded its limit (=232)
and wrapped around.
Sync loss: The error check is not valid due to sync
loss on the PRBS sequence.

Buttons:
Reset:
Close:
Help:

204

Resets the PRBS Counter (includes the PRBS Rate)


Closes the property sheet.
Press this button to get help on the current property sheet page.
For help on an item, click
at the top of the dialog box, then
click the item.
B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.4.4

21x2Mbit/s Looping (IDU: EMDK42A, 21x2Mbit/s


Extension board: 2NCS635A)
It is possible to set loops on each individual dropped 2Mbit/s. These loops
are further explained later in this chapter. It is only possible to set one kind
of loop at the time on a specific 2Mbit/s tributary.
The Looping configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. Press the
21x2Mbit/s tab to view/change the tributary looping settings. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Looping from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-37 Looping Configuration Sheet, 21x2Mbit/s Tab

B4008 Rev. M

205

CityLink
Fields:

Description:

2Mbit/s

The physical port number on the 21x2Mbit/s tributary


board.
Loop type
The user can select between three different loops.
Legal values are:
None
2Mbit-In 2Mbit-Out Near End
TMX DXC Near End
2Mbit-Out 2Mbit-In Far End
Remaining time This is a status field for the remaining time the loop
will be present. When the time has expired, i.e. the
loops is switched off, this field will be set to Loop
cleared.
ON/OFF
This column will contain cells that functions as checkboxes. If the user clicks a cell that isnt checked, a
Loop Timer dialog will be launched (see Figure VII38). The user can set the duration of the loop from this
dialog. If the Loop type is None for a specific loop
item, the user cant check this loop items checkbox.
Note: If the user, by means of the Drop or Continue dialog, removes any
of the tributaries in the list above, they will automatically be removed
from the list! This means that the number of loop items in the list (eight
in the figure above) will not be constant, but will be the same as in the
Drop or Continue dialog.

Figure VII-38 The Loop Timer Dialog Box

206

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


To change the settings:

1 First, double-click the desired cell in the Looping type column. A


combobox with the available loops will be shown over the cell.
2 Select a looping type from the comboboxs drop down list. Click
anywhere outside the cell in question to apply the setting
3 Click on the ON/OFF checkbox of the loop item in question. A Loop
Timer dialog will be launched (see Figure VII-38).
4 In the Loop Timer dialog set the desired expire time for the loop item
in question and close this dialog by clicking the OK button.
5 The checkbox of the loop item in question will now have been checked.
The Remaining time cell of the loop item in question will be updated
every 5th second with the remaining time of the loop.
6 To clear a loop just click the checked checkbox of the loop item in
question.
Note: Every altered setting to any item in the list will be applied the
target immediately.

4.4.5

DS3/E3 Looping
The DS3/E3 card includes three PDH ports, each of which supports looping.
The card supports Far End Loop, Near End Loop, PRBS insertion and PRBS
verification. The loops are available when the PDH Ports on the DS3/E3 card
have been configured to add or drop traffic.
A PRBS signal can be inserted on all three PDH ports instead of the regular
traffic. The incoming PRBS signal can then be checked in order to verify the
quality of the communication path. To check the quality of the signal, a PRBS
counter is configured to count the errors on one of the PDH Ports in one of
the DS3/E3 directions. An error is detected when the signal differs from the
expected PRBS signal.
The DS3/E3 card has one PRBS generator that can be muxed into either
inbound or outbound direction on one or more ports simultaneously. The
PRBS generator can be inverted. For E3 the PRBS polynom is 223 - 1 and for
DS3 the PRBS polynom is 215 -1. The PRBS checker is available at one of the
PDH ports in either inbound or outbound direction and can also check
inverted PRBS signals.

B4008 Rev. M

207

CityLink
The Looping Configuration Property sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Looping from the Configuration
menu .

Figure VII-39

Looping Configuration Sheet, DS3/E3

Property page controls:


Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates which way
the signal is looped. The colour of the loop arrows describes
the status of the loop:
Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information
has not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message
has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is waiting for
a response from the NE. (The loop settings have not
been confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot
be toggled when the status is unknown.
Black:The loop is off (inactive)
Red: The loop is on (active)

208

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


PRBS Generator:

Generates a PRBS signal that can be inserted into one


or both directions of the PDH Port.
Arrow buttons: Press a button to insert the PRBS
signal from the generator to the PDH
Port. Red=enabled, black=disabled,
blue=unknown status.
Inverted:
When checked, the generated PRBS
signal is inverted.

PRBS Check:

Counts PRBS errors. Errors can be counted on one of


the PDH ports in one of the DS3/E3 directions at a time.
Arrow buttons: Press a button to enable the error
detection for the desired traffic
direction. Red=enabled, black=
disabled, blue=unknown status.
Inverted:
When checked, an inverted PRBS
signal is expected.
Count:
The total number of deviations
detected between the received
signal and expected PRBS signal.
Rate:
The number of deviations detected
between the received signal and
expected PRBS signal per second.
Reset button: Resets the cumulative counter.
Status:
OK: Error check is valid.
Counter overflow: The error check
is not valid because the counter
has exceeded its limit (=232) and
wrapped around.
Sync loss: The error check is not
valid due to sync loss on the PRBS
sequence.

Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and
NE. Loop status is updated regularly (5 second
interval) as long as this property sheet is open.

B4008 Rev. M

209

CityLink
4.5
4.5.1

In Door Unit (IDU)


IDU Production Data
The IDU production data property sheet shows the production serial
numbers and the production and test dates of the IDU. Only an administrator can change the settings.
This sheet is also used for calibrating the Optical Line interface. Calibration is only needed when the optical unit is beginning to get old.
The IDU Production Data configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit
Production Data from the
Configuration menu.

Figure VII-40 IDU Production Data Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Description:

Article code:
Serial no:
HW revision:
MAC address:

The Article Code


The Serial number.
Hardware revision
The Media Access Control address of
the NE.
The date when the article was produced.
The date when the article was tested.
The date when the Factory Acceptance
Test was found to be satisfactory.

Production date:
Test date:
FAT date:

210

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.5.2

64 kbit/s Channels
Two 64 kbit/s channels can be inserted into the SOH. Each of the 64 kbit/s
channel will occupy one byte of the SOH frame. Press the SOH Frame button
to select which bytes of the SOH that are used by the 64 kbit/s Channels.
One channel is the V.1l. This channel has to be of type V.11 Contra. The
other is the G.703 Channel. This channel can be either G.703 Co or
G.703 Contra. Both channels can be retrieved from and inserted into the
line and radio side independently.
The 64 kbit/s Channels configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit
64 kbit/s Channels from the
Configuration menu.

Figure VII-41 64 kbit/s Channels Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

211

CityLink
Fields:

Choices:

Description

Enabled
Disabled

Enables the 64 kbit/s Channel.


Disables the 64 kbit/s Channel.

Status:

Type:

Choose linecode for 64 kbit/s Channel.


V.11 Contra (Channel V.11)
G.703 Co
(Channel G.703)
G.703 Contra (Channel G.703)

Direction:
Line
Radio

Timeslot:

212

Choose the direction the 64 kbit/s Rx


Channel should be extracted from.
64 kbit/s Rx is inserted from
line SOH frames.
64 kbit/s Rx is inserted from
radio SOH frames.
Shows which timeslot in the SOH the
64 kbit/s Rx Channel occupy.

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.5.3

2 Mbit/s Wayside Channel


A 2 Mbit/s channel can be inserted in the SOH in either line-direction or radiodirection. The 2 Mbit/s channel will occupy 33 bytes (32 bytes data + 1 byte
alignment information) of the SOH. Press the SOH Frame button to view
which bytes of the SOH that are used by the 2 Mbit/s Wayside Channel. The
2 Mbit/s channel uses the Rx and Tx connection at the front panel of the IDU.
Rx is received data and Tx is sent data.
The 2 Mbit/s Wayside configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting the IDU node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit
2 Mbit/s Wayside from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-42

2 Mbit/s Wayside Channel Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Options: Description:

Status

Enabled
Disabled

Direction
Line
Radio

B4008 Rev. M

Enables the Wayside Channel


Disables the Wayside Channel
Choose the direction the Wayside Rx channel
should be extracted from.
The Wayside channel is extracted from line
SOH. When the rate is set to DS1, the Line
direction is not available.
The Wayside channel is extracted from radio
SOH.

213

CityLink
Rate

E1
DS1
Coding

HDB3
AMI
B8ZS
Sensitivity

-30dB
-36dB
Cable Length

Choose the rate of the Wayside channel.


This field is only available when the NE
supports DS1 Wayside functionality. If not,
the rate is assumed to be E1.
2 Mbit/s
1.5 Mbit/s
Choose the coding of the Wayside channel.
This field is only available when the NE
supports DS1 Wayside functionality. If not,
the coding is assumed to be of type HDB3.
Only available for E1
Only available for DS1
Only available for DS1
This field is only available when the NE is
equipped with the DS3/E3 Extension Board
and the DS1 rate is selected
Only available for DS1
Only available for DS1
This field is only available when the NE is
equipped with the DS3/E3 Extension Board
and the DS1 rate is selected

133-266 feet
266-399 feet
399-533 feet
533-655 feet
-7.5dB CSU
-15dB CSU
-22dB CSU

Buttons:
SOH frame

214

Press this button to view which timeslots in the SOH


the Wayside channel occupies.

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.5.4

SOH X-Connect
Two 64kbit/s (one SOH timeslot) cross-connections can be set up. The
cross-connections bypass the SORP so that the SOH time-slots are sent
from the Line receive unit directly to the Radio transmit unit.
The SOH X-Connect configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also
be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit X-Connect from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-43

B4008 Rev. M

SOH X-Connect Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Description:

Enabled/Disabled
Line timeslot
Radio timeslot

Switches SOH X-Connect on/off


The time slot to bypass the SORP.
The destination time slot.

215

CityLink
4.5.5

Error Pulse Output


For test purposes.
The SORP and Viterbi asics give error pulses when they recognize errors. The
number of error pulses per second is a measurement of the quality of the
received signals. These error pulses can be sent out on the ALM/AUX port.
The Error Pulse Output configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting the IDU node in the Explorer view and then
selecting Edit Error Pulse Output from the Configuration menu.

216

Figure VII-44

Error Pulse Output Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Choices:

Enabled/Disabled
Source

Toggles Error Pulse Output On/Off


Only one source
at a time.
FEC radio
The output pin reflects the FEC on
the Viterbi asic.
B1 line
The output pin reflects the B1 on
the Line Receive side of the SORP.
B2 line
The output pin reflects the B2 on the
Line Receive side of the SORP.
B1 radio
The output pin reflects the B1 on the
Radio Receive side of the SORP.
B2 radio
The output pin reflects the B2 on the
Radio Receive side of the SORP.

Description:

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.5.6

Auxiliary Output Configuration


The auxiliary output function must be enabled in the Available Functions
property sheet (see Chapter 2.2, this Section) to use the function.
There are four configurable auxiliary output pins in the ALM/AUX port.
The pins are connected to a relay, which can either be controlled manually,
or triggered automatically on a user selectable set of alarms.
The Auxiliary Output Configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit
Auxiliary Output from the
Configuration menu.

Figure VII-45

B4008 Rev. M

Auxiliary Output Configuration Sheet

Controls:

Choices:

Description:

Output control
radio buttons

Manual Control
or
Alarm Trigger

Manual relay
status radio
buttons

Closed or Open

Set the usage of the aux.output


pin. (This will be disabled if the
CityLink does not support
alarm triggers.)
If the aux. output is set to
manual control, these buttons
will be enabled, and can be used
to manually control the state of
the relay.
217

CityLink
Controls:

Choices:

Equipment tree

Alarm trigger list

Add alarm button

Remove
alarm button

Alarm triggered
radio buttons

Closed or Open

Description:
Displays and selects the alarms
available for alarm triggers.
This will be disabled if the aux.
output is set to manual control.
Displays the alarm triggers
configured. This will be disabled if the aux. output is set to
manual control.
Adds the currently selected
alarm in the equipment tree to
the alarm trigger list. If there is
no selection, or if the selected
tree node doesnt correspond to
an alarm, nothing happens.
Disabled if the output is on
manual control.
Removes the currently selected
alarm from the alarm trigger list.
Disabled if the output is on
manual control.
If the aux. output is set to alarm
triggered control, these buttons
will be enabled, and can be used
to control the state of the relay
when the alarm conditions are
raised.

Buttons:
Get:

Press this button to retrieve the current settings from the NE.
(The settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the
dialog box is opened).
Set:
Press this button to update the element with any changes made to
any of the Auxiliary Output pages in the dialog box.
Close: Closes the dialog box.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet. For help
on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then click the item.

218

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.5.7

Diagnose
The Diagnose function retrieves data about memory, boot errors and warnings,
boot version and number of resets of the SU of the NE. Press Get to retrieve the
data from the NE. The diagnose tests are performed at IDU reset. (Note that the
Viterbi decoder and SORP1 are only tested at cold reset)
The Diagnose configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit
Diagnose from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-46

Module

Diagnose Configuration Sheet

Status

Comments

CPLD

OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed


at last reset/startup.
RTC
OK/Low bat/ A write/read test sequence was performed
Not running at last reset/startup.
LCD
OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last reset/startup.
DRAM
OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last reset/startup.
SRAM
OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last reset/startup.
Code FLASH
OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last reset/startup.
Boot FLASH
OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last reset/startup.
Viterbi Decoder OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last startup.
SORP
OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last startup.
B4008 Rev. M

219

CityLink
4.5.8

Self Test
The Self Test function uses a two step procedure for testing the IDU. The
first test sets a CMI loop, while the second test sets an IF loop. For both
loops, a PRBS is created in the SORP and errors are counted and
synchronization losses are registered as the signal returns from the loops.
Press Test to start the Self Test.
WARNING!
When performing a Self Test the STM-1 traffic will be destroyed.
The Self Test dialog box can be opened from the Configuration context
menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The dialog box can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit Self Test from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-47

4.5.9

Selt Test Dialog Box

BER Thresholds
The Viterbi decoder is a component using a Viterbi low complexity algorithm
for decoding/error correcting the received bit-sequence in the NE. The
Viterbi error rate is used as a quality measurement for the radio hop.
When the Viterbi error rate exceeds certain values, alarms are generated.
The threshold values decide when alarms are generated. The threshold
values can be changed by the user.
Alarm Id
HBER
LBER
EW-BER

220

Default value
Indicator for BER > 1e-3
Indicator for LBER > 1e-6
Indicator for EW-BER > 1e-10

Alarm severity
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Internal proportions: HBER > LBER > EW
The BER Threshold configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Radio node under the IDU node in the Explorer view.
The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Radio node
under the IDU node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit BER
Threshold from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-48

BER Threshold Configuration Sheet

Fields: Choices:

Description:

HBER

Error bit rate


A Major alarm is generated when the Viterbi
error rate exceeds the HBER threshold value.
AIS is inserted when the HBER threshold
value is exceeded.
Error bit rate
A Minor alarm is generated when the Viterbi
error rate exceeds the LBER threshold value.
Error bit rate.
A Warning is generated when the Viterbi
error rate exceeds the Error Warning
threshold value.

1.010-3 - 1.010-10

LBER 1.010-3 - 1.010-11

EW

B4008 Rev. M

1.010-3 - 1.010-12

221

CityLink
4.5.10

OSI Configuration
The OSI configuration has to be set to get OSI traffic on your LAN, routed
through the Nera network.

4.5.10.1

OSI Line Coding


Choose the scheme for the encoding of the binary data stream in the
communication channels. The two ends of a communications line must be
configured with the same Line Encoding in order to communicate!

Figure VII-49

Fields:

OSI Configuration Sheet, Line Coding Tab

Description:

NI1:
The line coding for the NI1 interface. Can be NRZ or NRZI.
NI2:
The line coding for the NI2 interface. Can be NRZ or NRZI.
DCC Line: The line coding for the DCC Line interface.
Can be NRZ or NRZI.
DCC Radio: The line coding for the DCC Radio interface.
Can be NRZ or NRZI.

222

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.5.10.2

OSI Parameters
Configure the OSI parameters for the different communication channels.
To enable OSI for the different channels, do this at the appropriate
Communication ports configuration page. Link state protocol buffer size
apply to all channels.

Figure VII-50

B4008 Rev. M

OSI Configuration Sheet, Parameters Tab

223

CityLink
Fields:

Subfield:

Description:

NSAP Address

Area ID
Host ID
End Selector

Subnet address.
End system address.
Type of service. Always 01.

Link state
protocol
buffer size
Parameters

224

Transmitted buffer length size of IS


hello-packets.(512-1492 bytes)

MTU size

Maximum Transmission Unit size.


(512-1497 bytes)
Default Metric Cost of path.
LAPD Role: Client/Server role
The two ends of a communications line
must be configured with the opposite
roles in order to communicate!
OSI Enabled This control is checked if OSI is
enabled for the respective interface.
This is set in the NI or DCC Communication Ports Configuration pages

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.5.10.3

OSI Routing Table


This page shows the OSI Routing Table contained in the IDU. The list
shows Host Id and Metric for all entries in the table. To get an updated
Routing Table, press the Get Button.

Figure VII-51

B4008 Rev. M

OSI Configuration Sheet, Routing Table Tab

Fields:

Description:

Host Id
Metric

End system address.


Cost of path.

225

CityLink
4.5.10.4

OSI Interface Information


There will be one line in the table for each channel enabled for OSI.

226

Figure VII-52

OSI Configuration Sheet, Interface Information Tab

Fields:

Description:

Id
InterfaceName
Media
Status
MTU Size

Numbering of interfaces in the network


Network user
Type of media
Indication of connection status (Up or Down)
Maximum transmission unit size

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.5.11

Laser Control
The optical port may or may not have implemented Automatic Laser
Shutdown (ALS). This is a function designed for eye safety purposes,
according to ITU-T rec. G.958. When implemented, ALS may be enabled
or disabled.
When ALS is not implemented or enabled the laser must be turned on/off
manually.
When ALS is enabled, the laser automatically will restart after a waiting
time period (selectable), when having previously been turned off. (If the
section of operation is not connected or Loss Of Optical Signal from far
end is detected, the laser will again be turned off after 2 sec.) The waiting
period is by default set to 1 minute.
The Laser Control configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Optical Line node under the IDU node in
the Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Optical Line node under the IDU node in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit
Laser Control from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-503

B4008 Rev. M

Laser Control Configuration Sheet

227

CityLink
Fields:

Buttons:

Description:

ALS:
Enabled/Disabled
Waiting Time

Toggles ALS On/Off


(1.0 - 5.0 minutes ) Specifies waiting
time before the laser is turned on. If
section of operation is connected and
optical signal from far end is present,
laser will remain on, if not laser will
be turned off after 2 seconds.
Get
Retrieves Laser Control settings
from the NE.
Set
Sends Laser Control settings to the NE.
Restart (2 Seconds) Manually restart the laser for
2 seconds.
Restart (90 Seconds) Manually restart the laser for
90 seconds for testing purposes.
Manual
Control:
On
Off
Status:

228

(ALS disabled or not implemented)


Manually turn the laser on.
Manually turn the laser off.
Shows the status of the Laser Unit.

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.5.12

IDU Replace Unit Wizard


The Replace Unit Wizard simplifies the process of replacing an IDU. The
wizard copies configuration data from old IDU to the new IDU.

Note:
The NEW program must be directly connected to the LCT port on the
IDU (serial communication).
The old NEs configuration data is copied to the new IDU,
including Element ID. Thus the addresses of the new IDU
become equal to the addresses of the old IDU.
Available Functions data is not copied. The new IDU may have
other optional functions available than the old IDU.
The wizard describes each step in the replacement process.

Figure VII-54

B4008 Rev. M

The IDU Replace Unit Wizard

229

CityLink
4.6

Out Door Unit (ODU)

4.6.1

Type I ODU

4.6.1.1

Frequency Settings
The Duplex Distance between the Rx and Tx band is fixed. The user can set
the Tx frequency by clicking on the frequency slots. Since the duplex
distance is fixed the Rx frequency will be automatically set. The corresponding Tx and Rx frequency must be set in the opposite NE.
Note! Dual Frequency - Single Polarisation (DF-SP) requires two channels in order to transmit 2xSTM-1. With this configuration, adjacent
channels can not be used.
NEW NMS/Configurator receives the frequency plan from the NE.
When no NE is connected (off-line), no frequency plan will be shown.
The output power is automatically muted when the frequency setting is
executed.
The Frequency configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the ODU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the ODU node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit
Frequency from the Configuration
menu.

Figure VII-55

230

Frequency Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Fields:

Description:

Frequency
plan
Coding

Select the desired frequency plan. The frequency


plan must correspond to your transceiver.
The coding function used in the modulator/
demodulator. These coding functions may be
selectable depending on frequency plan:
TCM (Trellis coded modulation) and TCM + RS
(Trellis coded modulation and Reed Solomon).
Modulation
The modulation scheme used with this frequency
plan
Data Rate
The data rate(s) supported by this frequency plan.
The available data rates may also be dependent on
radio type, radio software version and coding.
Channel Spacing (MHz) The distance between the channels in this frequency plan
Duplex Distance (MHz) The distance between the TX and the RX carrier
frequency.
Innermost Spacing (MHz)The distance between the highest selectable freqquency in the lower half of the plan and the lowest
selectable frequency in the upper half og the plan.
TX Frequency (GHz)
The used TX Carrier frequency
RX Frequency (GHz)
The used RX Carrier frequency
TX (min) (GHz)
TX Lower sideband frequency for this frequency
plan
TX(max)(GHz)
TX Upper sideband frequency for this frequency
plan
RX(min)(GHz)
RX Lower sideband frequency for this frequency
plan
RX(max)(GHz)
RX Upper sideband frequency for this frequency
plan

To change the settings:

1. Get the current settings from the Network element by pressing Get. (The
settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the property-sheet
is opened)
2. Alter the settings by clicking the frequency band you want to transmit
your TX data. The RX frequency is automatically updated since the
duplex Distance is fixed.
3. Press Set to send the changes to the NE.

B4008 Rev. M

231

CityLink
4.6.1.2

ODU Transceiver - Power Configuration


The Transceiver Power Configuration sheet lets the user set some Output
Power settings, some RF Input warning thresholds and ATPC settings.
ATPC (Automatic Transceiver Power Control) is a function for effectively reducing the interference probability in your network. The output power
from the transceiver is automatic controlled. If the regulation loop for the
ATPC stops functioning, an alarm is generated. This alarm can be delayed.
The output power is automatically muted when the frequency setting is
executed.
The Power configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the ODU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also
be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the ODU node in the Explorer view
and then selecting Edit
Power from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-56

232

Power Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Fields:

Denomination: Description:

RF input level
warning, high

dBm

The upper threshold value for when


to generate an RF input level
warning (Alarm no. 1504)

RF input level
warning, low

dBm

The lower threshold value for when


to generate an RF input level
warning (Alarm no. 1504)

ATPC
alarm level

dBm

Set the power level to use when an


ATPC alarm occurs.

ATPC
reference level

dBm

The wanted input level when ATPC


is activated.

Mute
output power
Maximum
output power

dBm

Maximum output power for


transmitting

Manual
output level

dBm

The output power level used when


ATPC is not activated

ATPC status

ATPC Disabled/ Enabled

ATPC mode

ATPC can operate in four different modes:


Automatic Regulation: The transceiver automatically regulates the
transmitter power
Minimum Output: A min. amount of
power is used for transmitting.
Maximum Output: A max. amount of
power is used for transmitting.
Freeze Output Power: A fixed amount
of power is used for transmitting.

ATPC
alarm delay

B4008 Rev. M

Mutes the output power. No output


power is sent.

Seconds

The ATPC alarm can be delayed from


1 to 15 seconds.

233

CityLink
4.6.1.3

ODU Production Data


The ODU production data property sheet shows the production serial
numbers and the production and test dates of the ODU. Only an administrator can change the settings.
The ODU Production Data configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the ODU node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the ODU node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit
Production Data from the
Configuration menu.

Figure VII-57

Fields:

Description:

Article code:
Serial no:
HW revision:
Sales order:
Production date:
Test date:
FAT date:

The article code


The serial number.
Hardware revision
The purchase order.
The date when the article was produced.
The date when the article was tested.
The date when the Factory Acceptance Test was
found to be satisfactory.
The date when the Site Acceptance Test was
found to be satisfactory.

SAT date:
234

ODU Production Data Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.6.2

Type II ODU

4.6.2.1

RF Power
The XCVR Unit provides a set of RF power control functions:
RF input alarm thresholds can be set such that an alarm is raised when
the input level exceeds the upper or lower limits.
ATPC (Automatic Transmitter Power Control) is a function for effectively reducing the interference probability in the network. When ATPC
is enabled, the output power from the transmitter is automatically
controlled according the received input power on the other side of the
hop. The ATPC alarm is generated if the ATPC regulation loop fails.
This alarm can be optionally delayed.
If ATPC is not enabled, the transmitted output level can be set. The
transmitter can also be muted.
The RF Power property sheet is used to display/configure the RF Power
control settings.

Figure VII-58

B4008 Rev. M

RF Power Configuration Sheet

235

CityLink
Fields:
Mute output power: When checked the output power is muted.
Maximum output level (dBm): The transmitters maximum output power.
Manual Transmit Output Power (MTPC): ATPC is disabled. Constant
manual output level is used.
Automatic Transmit Output Power (ATPC): ATPC is enabled. Output
level is automatically adjusted using the specified ATPC settings.
Alarm Thresholds:
RF-INPUT-WARNING, high (dBm): If the RF input level exceeds
this value the RF-INPUT-WARNING alarm is raised.
RF-INPUT-WARNING, low (dBm): If the RF input level goes
below this value the RF-INPUT-WARNING alarm is raised.
MTPC:
Manual output level (dBm): The output power used when ATPC is
disabled.
ATPC:
Reference input level (dBm): The desired input level. If ATPC is
enabled on the transmitter across the hop, that transmitter will regulate
its output power such that the received input level at this receiver is
equal to the reference level.
Default output level (dBm): The output power to be used if the ATPC
regulation loop fails. (The ATPC alarm is raised).
Alarm delay (s): The delay (in seconds) before the ATPC alarm is
raised after the ATPC regulation loop fails.
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and
NE.

236

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.6.2.2

Frequency Settings
The Frequency property sheet displays the frequency settings for the
transceiver unit. Available frequency plans and their parameters are stored
in a table in the NEW-NMS database. If the wanted frequency plan cannot
be found in the combo box, please contact Nera for upgrading the database
table. When frequency data is retrieved from the NE, the data are matched
against frequency plans stored in your database system. If a match is found
the appropriate frequency plan is selected, otherwise a frequency plan can
be selected from the combo box.
To change the frequencies:
1. Select a frequency plan from the combo box.
2. Select a TX frequency by pressing a button in the frequency plan. The
RX frequency will be calculated from TX frequency and the duplex
distance.
3. Send the new settings to the NE. (Press the Set button in the property
sheet). A message box will be displayed asking whether to apply the
contrary frequencies to the other side of the hop (if the remote NE is
present in NEW).

Figure VII-59

B4008 Rev. M

Frequency Configuration Sheet

237

CityLink
Fields:
Frequency Plan:
Selected plan: The currently selected frequency plan. The graphical
presentation of the plan contains channel buttons that can be used to set
the TX and RX frequencies for the selected channel in the list.
Modulation: modulation method: 32TCM, 64TCM or 128 TCM.
Channel spacing: The distance in MHz between two consecutive
channels.
Data rate: STM-1 or STM-0.
Current Setting:
TX frequency (GHz): The Transmitter frequency.
RX frequency (GHz): The Receiver frequency.
Transceiver limits: The frequency band limits of the transceiver.
Status: Frequency status:
OK: Frequency settings are OK.
Frequency shifting: The frequencies are changed on both sides of the
hop. If no connection is established within 10 seconds the frequencies
will be reverted.
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and
NE.

238

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.6.2.3

DRO Tuning
The XCVR Units DRO Tuning property sheet is used to enable and disable
DRO Tuning mode for the individual XCVR unit. The tuning of the DRO
frequency is performed manually on the XCVR unit. See Chapter 4.6.2.2.

Disabled
Tx tuning
Rx tuning

Figure VII-60

Fields:
DRO Tuning Mode:
Disabled:
TX Tuning:
RX Tuning:
Status TX:
Status RX:

B4008 Rev. M

DRO Tuning Configuration Sheet

Description:
DRO Tuning mode is disabled for both DROs
Enables DRO Tuning mode for TX DRO
Enables DRO Tuning mode for RX DRO
Displays information concerning frequency lock
and screw direction for TX DRO
Displays information concerning frequency lock
and screw direction for RX DRO

239

CityLink
4.6.2.3

DRO Tuning Procedure

Tx Tuning

Rx Tuning

Figure VII-61

240

DRO Tuning Procedure

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.6.2.3.1

Frequency Setting
Highlight the actual Transceiver unit to be tuned. Right click and choose
Configuration and Frequency.

Transceiver Unit Ch1

Figure VII-62 Selecting in Explorer View the Transceiver to be tuned

Figure VII-63

Frequency Configuration Sheet

See Chapter 4.6.2.2 for setting of frequency.

B4008 Rev. M

241

CityLink
4.6.2.3.2

DRO Tuning
Highlight the actual Transceiver unit to be tuned. Right click and choose
Configuration and DRO Tuning

Figure VII-64

Selecting DRO tuning from the Explorer View

Tx tuning

Disabled
Tx tuning
Rx tuning

Figure VII-65

DRO Tuning Configuration Sheet

Select Tx tuning in the DRO Tuning Mode field. Press the Set button.
242

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator

Figure VII-66

DRO Tuning Configuration Sheet, Tx tuning

The red arrow indicates which way to adjust the DRO. In addition, the
Alarm LED on the front of the Transceiver will blink when the DRO must
be turned clockwise. If the Alarm LED is OFF, the DRO must be turned
counter-clockwise. When the Alarm LED is ON, the Synthesizer is in
lock. Press the Set button to update the window.

B4008 Rev. M

243

CityLink
Rx Tuning

Disabled
Tx tuning
Rx tuning

Figure VII-67

DRO Tuning Configuration Sheet

Select Rx tuning in the DRO Tuning Mode field. Press the Set button.

244

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator

Figure VII-68

DRO Tuning Configuration Sheet, Rx tuning

The red arrow indicates which way to adjust the DRO. In addition, the
Alarm LED on front of the Transceiver will blink when the DRO must be
turned clockwise. If the Alarm LED is OFF, the DRO must be turned
counter-clockwise. When the Alarm LED is ON the Synthesizer is in lock.
Press the Set button to update the window.

B4008 Rev. M

245

CityLink
4.6.2.4

Production Data
The different boards/units contain some production information. This
information is displayed in the Production Data property sheet.

Figure VII-69

Fields:

Production Data Configuration Sheet

Description:

Article code:
Serial no.:
HW revision:
Production date:

Uniquely identifies the type of board/unit.


The serial number of the board/unit.
The hardware revision.
When the production process was completed for
this board/unit.
Test date:
When this product was tested by the factory testdepartment.
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and
NE.

246

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.6.3

Type III ODU

4.6.3.1

RF Power
The XCVR Unit provides a set of RF power control functions:
RF input alarm thresholds can be set such that an alarm is raised when
the input level exceeds the upper or lower limits.
ATPC (Automatic Transmitter Power Control) is a function for effectively reducing the interference probability in the network. When ATPC
is enabled, the output power from the transmitter is automatically
controlled according the received input power on the other side of the
hop. The ATPC alarm is generated if the ATPC regulation loop fails.
This alarm can be optionally delayed.
If ATPC is not enabled, the transmitted output level can be set. The
transmitter can also be muted.
The RF Power property sheet is used to display/configure the RF Power
control settings.

Figure VII-70

B4008 Rev. M

Power Configuration Sheet

247

CityLink
Fields:
Mute output power: When checked the output power is muted.
Maximum output level (dBm): The transmitters maximum output
power.
Manual Transmit Output Power (MTPC): ATPC is disabled. Constant
manual output level is used.
Automatic Transmit Output Power (ATPC): ATPC is enabled. Output
level is automatically adjusted using the specified ATPC settings.
Alarm Thresholds:
RF-INPUT-WARNING, high (dBm): If the RF input level exceeds
this value the RF-INPUT-WARNING alarm is raised.
RF-INPUT-WARNING, low (dBm): If the RF input level goes
below this value the RF-INPUT-WARNING alarm is raised.
MTPC:
Manual output level (dBm): The output power used when ATPC is
disabled.
ATPC:
Reference input level (dBm): The desired input level. If ATPC is
enabled on the transmitter across the hop, that transmitter will regulate
its output power such that the received input level at this receiver is
equal to the reference level.
Default output level (dBm): The output power to be used if the ATPC
regulation loop fails. (The ATPC alarm is raised).
Alarm delay (s): The delay (in seconds) before the ATPC alarm is
raised after the ATPC regulation loop fails.
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and
NE.

248

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.6.3.2

Frequency Settings
The Frequency property sheet displays the frequency settings for the
transceiver unit. Available frequency plans and their parameters are stored
in a table in the NEW-NMS database. If the wanted frequency plan cannot
be found in the combo box, please contact Nera for upgrading the database
table. When frequency data is retrieved from the NE, the data are matched
against frequency plans stored in your database system. If a match is found
the appropriate frequency plan is selected, otherwise a frequency plan can
be selected from the combo box.
To change the frequencies:
1. Select a frequency plan from the combo box.
2. Select a TX frequency by pressing a button in the frequency plan. The
RX frequency will be calculated from TX frequency and the duplex
distance.
3. Send the new settings to the NE. (Press the Set button in the property
sheet). A message box will be displayed asking whether to apply the
contrary frequencies to the other side of the hop (if the remote NE is
present in NEW).

Figure VII-71

B4008 Rev. M

Frequency Configuration Sheet

249

CityLink
Fields:
Frequency Plan:
Selected plan: The currently selected frequency plan. The graphical
presentation of the plan contains channel buttons that can be used to set
the TX and RX frequencies for the selected channel in the list.
Modulation: modulation method: 32TCM or 128 TCM.
Channel spacing: The distance in MHz between two consecutive
channels.
Data rate: STM-1 or STM-0.
Current Setting:
TX frequency (GHz): The Transmitter frequency.
RX frequency (GHz): The Receiver frequency.
Transceiver limits: The frequency band limits of the transceiver.
Status: Frequency status:
OK: Frequency settings are OK.
Frequency shifting: The frequencies are changed on both sides of the
hop. If no connection is established within 10 seconds the frequencies
will be reverted.
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and
NE.

250

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.6.3.3

Production Data
The ODU production data property sheet shows the production serial
numbers and the production and test dates of the ODU. Only an administrator can change the settings.
The ODU Production Data configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the ODU node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the ODU node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit
Production Data from the
Configuration menu.

Figure VII-72

Fields:

Description:

Article code:
Serial no:
HW revision:
Sales order:
Production date:
Test date:
FAT date:

The article code


The serial number.
Hardware revision
The purchase order.
The date when the article was produced.
The date when the article was tested.
The date when the Factory Acceptance Test was
found to be satisfactory.
The date when the Site Acceptance Test was
found to be satisfactory.

SAT date:
B4008 Rev. M

Production Data Configuration Sheet

251

CityLink
4.6.4

Antenna Data
This sheet shows some main characteristics of the antenna. Only the
Antenna code can be altered. The antenna data are stored in a database file.
The Antenna Data configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Antenna node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Antenna node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Antenna from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-73

Fields:

Antenna Data Configuration Sheet

Description:

Antenna code
Gain

The antenna code. Unique code for each antenna type.


The antenna gain (dB). Gain is a measurement of the
antenna's ability to transform electrical signals to
electromagnetic waves.
Diameter
The physical antenna diameter. [meter]
Polarization
The polarization direction of the antenna.
Front/Back ratio Front/Back Ratio. Ratio between the gain in forward
direction and the gain in backward direction.
Frequency range The frequency range where the antenna can be expected
to operate successfully.
252

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


4.6.5

ODU Replace Unit Wizard


The Replace Unit Wizard simplifies the process of replacing an ODU. The
wizard copies configuration data from old ODU to the new ODU.
The wizard describes each step in the replacement process.

Figure VII-74

B4008 Rev. M

The ODU Replace Unit Wizard

253

CityLink

5.0

CityLink ADM

5.1

21x2 Mbit/s Extension Board

5.1.1

Drop or Continue
The Drop or Continue sheet is used to drop or remove a 2Mbit/s
stream(E1). The 21x2Mbit/s extension board supports 21 physical 2Mbit/s
ports. The user can assign any VC-12, out of the 63 available in the STM1 structure, to a specific 2Mbit/s port on this board. From which direction the
drop is to be taken must also be configurated.
The Drop or Continue configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the 21x2 Extension board node in the
Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting)
the 21x2 Extension board node in the Explorer view and then selecting
Edit
Drop or Continue from the Configuration menu.
Note: Even though the 21x2Mbit/s extension board is present in the
equipment this dialog will not be shown if the 21x2Mbits/s extension
board isnt enabled. This enabling must be done in the Section
Termination dialog which can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Transmission node in the Explorer view.

Figure VII-75
254

The Drop or Continue Configuration Sheet


B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Fields:

Description:

Port Number

The physical port number on the 21x2Mbit/s extension


board.
VC-12 Number The VC-12 number that the 2Mbit/s PDH stream
attached to the Port Number shall be routed to/from
(the numbers in the parenthesis is the VC-12 given in
KLM notation). It is possible to re-use a given VC-12 as
long as the Direction is different.
Direction
This parmeter indicates which direction the VC-12 is to
be routed to/from. It can either be line or radio.
Configured
Check this to add a drop or uncheck it to remove a drop.
If the checkbox is checked a new dialog will be launched.
This dialog is used to select the VC-12 Number and the
Direction. This dialog is explained in chapter 4.13.1.1.
Note1: If the user, by means of the VC-12 Selector Dialog, specifies a
VC-12 and a direction that is already in use, the setting will not be
applied!
Note2: If one attempts to remove a dropped VC-12 that is in use by the
clock synchronization in the Section Termination, the removing will be
rejected!

Buttons:
Clear selected item(s): With the mouse one can select one or several
items in the listview. When items are selected,
this button will be enabled. Click the button if
you wish to uncheck the selected items. Modifications that leads to a mismatch between the
dialog settings and the settings on the NE will
be tagged with a dirty token; *.
Get:
Click this button to retrieve the current settings
from the NE. Any modifications done to the
GUI elements will be lost and the dirty token
will be removed.
Set:
Click this button to send the settings to the NE.
Any modifications done to the GUI elements
will be applied the NE and the dirty token
will be removed.
Close:
Click this button to close the property sheet.
Help:
Press this button to get help on the current
property sheet. For help on an item, click
at
the top of the dialog box, then click the item.
B4008 Rev. M

255

CityLink
5.1.1.1

VC-12 Selector
This dialog is used to select a specific VC-12 from the 63 available in the
STM-1 payload. In addition to the VC-12 number, the direction from
which the specific VC-12 is routed to/from is also specified.
This dialog will be launched immediately after the user has checked an
item in the Drop or Continue dialog.

Figure VII-76

The VC-12 Selector Dialog Box

Fields:

Description:

VC-12 #
K

The VC-12 number. It must be in the interval [1,63].


The first of the three numbers in the KLM numbering scheme. The number must be in the interval [1,3].
Note that the user can either enter the K number
directly or use the up/down buttons to traverse the
number range.
L
The second of the three numbers in the KLM numbering scheme. The number must be in the interval
[1,7]. Note that the user can either enter the L
number directly or use the up/down buttons to traverse
the number range.
M
The third of the three numbers in the KLM numbering scheme. The number must be in the interval [1,3].
Note that the user can either enter the M number
directly or use the up/down buttons to traverse the
number range.
Drop From Line If selected, the VC-12 will be routed to/from the line
interface of the NE.
Drop From Radio If selected, the VC-12 will be routed to/from the
radio interface of the NE.

256

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Sub Network
SNCP performs path protection switching (called
Connection
dedicated protection) which manages all traffics by
Protection - SNCP a path. Working traffic is transmitted in one direction, and protection traffic in opposite direction
around the ring, and traffic is selected at each end of
the path. So, SNCP supports multiple rings, and
offers suitable solution for access and metro network where hub node terminates most various
traffics. SNCP can also transmit signal to only one
direction, west or east, and the products can be used
as 1+0 Linear ADM mode as well as SNCP mode.

Buttons:
OK:
Click this button to close the dialog and apply the setting.
Cancel: Click this button to close the dialog without applying the setting.

B4008 Rev. M

257

CityLink
5.1.2

PRBS Test - Check


The PRBS Test - Check sheet is used to set up which of the dropped
2Mbit/s tributaries that shall check a given PRBS. Only one 2Mbit/s
tributary can perform this test at the time.
The PRBS Test - Check configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the 21x2 Extension board node in the
Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting)
the 21x2 Extension board node in the Explorer view and then selecting
Edit
PRBS Test from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-77

258

The PRBS Test Check Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Fields:

Description:

2Mbit/s
The physical port number on the 21x2Mbit/s tributary board.
Direction Used to set from which Direction the tributary board shall
check PRBS. To change the setting, the user must doubleclick the Direction cell in question. When this happens, a
combobox will be displayed in the cell and the user can
select a new setting for the cell.
Inverted If this checkbox is checked, it will be assumed that the
received PRBS is inverted. If not checked, its assumed to
not be inverted.
Clear
If this checkbox is checked the Count cell will be cleared
when Set button is clicked.
Check
Only one tributary can be set to check PRBS at the time. This
means that only one item in the list above can be active at the
same time. In the figure above this is item-1. Item-2 through
item-8 arent active. If e.g. the radio button in item-1 in the
figure is clicked (the one that is active), it will be cleared. In
this case none of the tributaries will check PRBS.
Count
This cell will contain the number of error pulses. Its a 2^16
bits wrap-around counter. If the Status cell is Sync Loss,
this counter will not count but instead be set to . If the
Status cell is No Sync Loss, this counter will count errors.
Status
The status of the counter.
Note: If the user, by means of the Drop or Continue dialog, removes any
of the tributaries in the list above, they will automatically be removed
from the list!

B4008 Rev. M

259

CityLink
5.1.3

PRBS Test - Generators


The PRBS Test - Generators sheet is used to set up which of the dropped
2Mbit/s tributaries that shall generate PRBS. All tributaries can insert
PRBS simultaneously.
The PRBS Test - Generators configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the 21x2 Extension board node in the
Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting)
the 21x2 Extension board node in the Explorer view and then selecting
Edit PRBS Test from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-78

260

The PRBS Test Generators Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Fields:

Description:

2Mbit/s

The physical port number on the 21x2Mbit/s


tributary board.
Direction
Used to set in which Direction the tributary
board shall insert a PRBS. To change the setting
the user must double click the Direction cell in
question. When this happens, a combobox will
be displayed in the cell and the user can select a
new setting for the cell. Legal values are:
2Mbit/s
STM-1
2Mbit/s & STM-1
Both off
Insert
If this checkbox is checked a PRBS will be
inserted in the direction(s) specified by
Direction.
Insert inverted PRBS If this checkbox is checked all checked tributaries in the list will be inserted inverted PRBS.
If not checked its assumed to not be inverted.
Note: If the user, by means of the Drop or Continue dialog, removes any
of the tributaries in the list above, they will automatically be removed
from the list!

B4008 Rev. M

261

CityLink
5.1.4

Production Data - 21x2Mbit/s Extension board


(2NCS635A)
Production data for the 21x2Mbit/s extension board, displayed on a separate
page in the Production Data configuration sheet. Only an administrator can
change the settings.
The Production Data configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the IDU- or Switch node in the Explorer view.
The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU- or
Switch node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Production
Data from the Configuration menu. Then the production data is located
under the Tab named 21x2Mbit/s Extension Board.

262

Fields:

Description:

Article Code
Serial no.
HW revision
Production date
Test date

The Article Code of the card/unit.


The Serial number of the card/unit.
Hardware revision of the card/unit.
The date when the article was produced.
The date when the article was tested.

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


5.2

DS3/E3 Extension Board

5.2.1

DS3/E3 Configuration
The DS3/E3 functionality allows the operator to connect two Virtual Containers (VC) in different ports. The connections are identified by using the
background colour of the ports together with the KLM address of the virtual
container. The background colour of a virtual container identifies the source
port, while the KLM address identifies the source address.
As an example consider the marked VCs in Figure VII-79. The VC on the Line
Port is connected with the VC having a KLM address of 1,2,1 on the Radio
Port. While the VC on the Radio Port is connected with the VC having a KLM
address of 1,1,1 on the Line Port.
SNCP functionality is available on the DS3/E3 Port and is identified with a
split cell.
Traffic Looping is achieved by connecting VCs on the same port and is only
available for the line - and radio port. The DS3/E3 port does not support traffic
looping, but does however support test looping. DS3/E3 looping is only
available on the connected when the port has been configured to add/drop
traffic.
The DS3/E3 Configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the DS3/E3 Extension Board node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the DS3/E3 Extension
Board node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit DS3/E3 from the
Configuration menu .

B4008 Rev. M

263

CityLink

Figure VII-79

DS3/E3 Configuration Sheet

Buttons:
SNCP:

Press this button to establish an SNCP connection. The SNCP


functionality will apply to the same virtual container on all
ports. SNCP is available on the DS3/E3 Port.
Source:
To establish a connection, select a virtual container from one
of the ports. Press this button to set the selected container as
the source.
Destination: Select a virtual container from one of the ports and press this
button to set the selected container as the destination.
Disconnect: Select a virtual container which already has an established
connection. Press this button to remove the connection.
Cancel:
Press this button to undo the current operation.
Get:
Press this button to retrieve the current settings from the
NE. (The settings are automatically retrieved from the
NE when the dialog box is opened).
Set:
Press this button to send the settings to the NE.
Close:
Closes the property sheet.
Help:
Press this button to get help on the current property sheet. For
help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then click
the item.
264

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


5.2.2

DS3/E3 Frame Structure Configuration


The operator may configure the frame structure on the three ports. Each port
consists of three TUG-3s ( SDH Multiplex Structure). Each TUG-3 contains
either a VC-3 structure or a VC-12 structure. The virtual containers on the
ports are identified using KLM notation:

Figure VII-80

B4008 Rev. M

Virtual Containers

265

CityLink

Figure VII-81

DS3/E3 Frame Structure Configuration Sheet

Buttons:
VC-3:
VC-12:
Get:

Set:
Close:
Help:

SDH:
SONET:

266

Sets the current structure to VC-3.


Sets the current structure to VC-12.
Press this button to retrieve the current settings from the
NE. (The settings are automatically retrieved from the
NE when the dialog box is opened).
Press this button to send the settings to the NE.
Closes the property sheet.
Press this button to get help on the current property sheet. For
help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then click
the item.
This button indicates that the transmission standard is set to
SDH.
This button indicates that the transmission standard is set to
SONET.

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


5.3
5.3.1

ADM STM-1 Extension Board (X-Connect)


X-Connect Frame Structure Configuration
The operator may configure the frame structure on the three ports. For more
info, please refer to Chapter 5.2.2 (this Section)
The Frame Structure Configuration property page is available from the
Transmission Configuration property sheet. Select Enable X-Connect
from the Termination Enabling combo box in the Termination and SETS
property page. The Transmission Configuration property sheet can be
opened from the Configuration context menu of the transmission node in the
Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the
transmission node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Transmission Configuration from the Configuration menu .

Figure VII-82

Frame Structure Configuration Sheet

Buttons:
VC-3:
VC-12:

B4008 Rev. M

Sets the current structure to VC-3.


Sets the current structure to VC-12.

267

CityLink
5.3.2

X-Connect Configuration
The X-connect functionality allows the operator to connect two Virtual
Containers (VC) in different ports. The connections are identified by using
the background colour of the ports together with the KLM address of the
virtual container. The background colour of a VC identifies the source port,
while the KLM address identifies the source address.
As an example consider the marked VCs in the figure below. The VC on the
Line Port is X-connected with the virtual container having a KLM address
of 1,2,1 on the Radio Port. While the VC on the Radio Port is X-connected
with the VC having a KLM address of 1,1,1 on the Line Port.
SNCP functionality is available on the Line Port and is identified with a split
cell.
Looping is achieved by connecting VCs on the same port (Traffic Looping).
The X-Connect Configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the X-Connect Extension Board node in the Explorer view.
The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the X-Connect
Extension Board node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit XConnect from the Configuration menu .

Figure VII-83
268

X-Connect Frame Structure Configuration Sheet


B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Buttons:
SNCP:

Press this button to establish an SNCP connection. The SNCP


functionality will apply to the same virtual container on all
ports. SNCP is available on the Line Port.
Source:
To establish a connection, select a virtual container from one
of the ports. Press this button to set the selected container as
the source.
Destination: Select a virtual container from one of the ports and press this
button to set the selected container as the destination.
Disconnect: Select a virtual container which already has an established
connection. Press this button to remove the connection.
Cancel:
Press this button to undo the current operation.

B4008 Rev. M

269

CityLink

6.0
6.1

Hot Standby
General
A CityLink Hot Standby system consists of two InDoor Units connected to
an IDU Switch and two OutDoor Units connected to the a HSB branching
unit. The IDU switch performs switching in the Rx direction, while the
branching unit has an RF-switch in the Tx direction.

Figure VII-84

6.1.1

Hot Standby Explorer view

Functionality
The IDU switch will perform most of the normal tasks of an IDU, with the two
IDUs maintaining modem functionality. Thus, configuration of line inputs,
wayside channels etc will be handled on the switch, while modem-specific
functionality (e.g Viterbi error pulses) is found on the IDU. Some functionality, like auxiliary outputs, are found in both places.

270

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


6.1.2

Element ID
The CityLink Element ID property sheet shows some main information about
the Network Element like name, type, serial number and different addresses.
The enabled fields can be altered by users with proper user privileges.
The Element ID configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also
be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the Explorer view
and then selecting Edit Element ID from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-85 Element ID Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

271

CityLink
Fields:

Description:

Serial number:
NE type:
Name:
Section address:
NE address:

The serial number of the NE. (Not editable)


The type of NE. (Not editable)
The name of the NE (max. 32 characters)
The section address of the NE. (1-254)
The NE address (1-128). Used for identification of
NEs within a section.
MAC address:
The Media Access Control address of the NE.
Used for OSI-Management. (Not editable)
NSAP address:
The Network Service Access Point address of the NE.
Used for OSI-Management.
IP address
The Internet Protocol address of the NE.
1+1 Hot Standby: Select this option in order to set up a hot standby
element. A list of choices are displayed in the droplist;
Standard, SD Combiner (Space Diversity Combiner),
SD Hybrid (Space Diversity Hybrid) and
Dual Antenna.
1+1 Freq. Diversity: Select this option in order to set up a frequency
diversity element. A list of choices are displayed in the
droplist; Standard, SD Combiner (Space Diversity
Combiner) and SD Hybrid (Space Diversity Hybrid)

To change the settings:


1 First, get the current settings from the NE by pressing Get.
(The settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the
property-sheet is opened.)
2 Alter the settings you want to change.
3 Press Set to send the changes to the NE.

272

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


6.1.2

Looping Configuration
When opening the Looping Sheet on a HSB NE, the pages for main, wayside
and 64Kbit looping will apply for both IDUs. If a loop is set on the IDU and
the system switches, the signal will still be looped.

6.1.2.1

HSB Main Looping


The Looping configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. Press the Main tab
to view/change the Main looping settings. The sheet can also be invoked
by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the Explorer view and then
selecting Edit Looping from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-86

B4008 Rev. M

HSB Looping Configuration Sheet

273

CityLink
Fields:
Loop buttons:

Loops will be
automatically
cleared after:

One button for each loop where the arrow indicates


which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop
arrows describes the status of the loop:
Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message
has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is waiting for a
response from the NE. (The loop settings have not been
confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot be toggled
when the status is unknown.
Black: The loop is off (inactive)
Red: The loop is on (active)
Displays the time of which all main traffic loops in the NE
will be cleared. This time is set by the user when activating
a loop.

The different main traffic loops


(from left to right in the respective blocks in Figure 70):
4S. SORP LT output to LR input loop, far-end (IDU Switch)
1S. SORP LR output to LT input loop, near-end (IDU Switch)
12S. SORP RT output to RR input loop, near-end (IDU Switch)
14A. IF loop, near-end (IDU A)
15A. IF loop, near-end (ODU A)
16A. RF loop, near-end (ODU A)
14B. IF loop, near-end (IDU B)
15B. IF loop, near-end (ODU B)
16B. RF loop, near-end (ODU B)

Buttons:
Close: Closes the property sheet.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet page. For
help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then click the item.

6.1.2.2

HSB 64Kbit/s Looping


Please refer to Chapter 4.4.2 (this Section).

6.1.2.3

HSB Wayside Looping


Please refer to Chapter 4.4.3 (this Section).

274

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


6.1.3

Hot Standby Configuration


The Hot Standby configuration sheet shows the switching configurations
for the IDU-Switch.
The Hot Standby configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the IDU-Switch node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also
be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU-Switch node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit Hot Standby from the Configuration menu.

Figure VII-87

Fields:

Common Tab in Element ID Configuration Sheet

Description

Auto / manual:
Active branch:

Select between automatic or manual hot standby switching


Select which branch that should be active.
Active branch is available in Manual mode only
Switching mode: In Bidirectional mode both Tx and Rx direction
switches at the same time.
In Unidirectional mode Tx and Rx can switch
independent of each other.
Switching mode can only be set Automatic mode. In
Manual mode, the switching mode is always Bidirectional.
Status list:
Displays the active branch(es) in the TX and RX
directions and whether there are RX/TX alarms in any of
the branches.

B4008 Rev. M

275

CityLink
6.1.4

Hot Standby Switching Criteria


The Hot Standby Switching Criteria page shows the automatic switching
criteria for the hot standby element, and enables the user to alter these
criteria.
The Hot Standby Switching Criteria page can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the IDU-Switch node in the Explorer view. The Hot
Standby configuration sheet then appears, and the switching criteria page
can be selected. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting)
the IDU-Switch node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Hot
Standby from the Configuration menu.
Note that setting switching criteria is only allowed on Citylink 2 Hot Standby
elements running with IDU software version R3C or higher. Also, the
switching mode set in the Hot Standby Config page must be set to Automatic.

Figure VII-88

Hot Standby Switching Criteria

Field descriptions:
The page consists of two lists; one for each branch. Each list contains alarm
names/categories and a checkbox for each name/category.

276

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration with NEW-Configurator


Switching algorithm
The following algorithm is applied in automatic switching mode:
Compute the total severity factor of each branch (SA, SB) using the following
formula:

SCenabled1is 1 if the switching criteria RF Input Alarm is enabled (checked),


else it is 0. SCactive1 is 1 if the alarm/category RF Input alarm is active
(present) on the element, else it is 0.
If SA = SB, switch to the preferred branch (The preferred branch is set in the
Hot Standby Config page)
If SA > SB, switch to SB if branch A is active.
If SB > SA, switch to SA if branch B is active.
Automatic Switch Mode
The IDU switch checks the state of both channel A and channel B regularly.
This task decides whether an Rx switch is needed or not. Similarly, the Tx
switching is controlled by the ODU. For the Tx switching to work, the
connected IDU signals the ODU when at least one of the switching criteria
are present on the IDU.
In automatic switch mode the following rule constrain switching:
A channel switch is performed if, and only if, the channel switched to, has
no switch conditions true.
On IDU A and IDU B, a dedicated task is continuously checking whether the
Rx or Tx switch criteria status has changed, and if so, notifies the IDU switch
and ODU about the change.
Currently, bi-directional switching is not implemented in automatic mode.
Manual Switch Mode
In manual switch mode, bi-directional switching is performed only as a result
of a Q1 message from external management software (e.g. NEW-NMS).
Currently, unidirectional switching is not implemented in manual mode.

B4008 Rev. M

277

CityLink
6.1.4

Reconfiguring a Hot Standby IDU for


use in 1+0 Configuration
An IDU that has been used in a HSB configuration will continue to be
configured as a HSB element until explicitly reconfigured. To do this, first
disconnect the IDU from the switch. Then use NEW-NMS to connect to
the element with a serial cable. NEW-NMS explorer view should now
display an equipment tree with a single node. Bring up the Element ID
dialog from the Configuration menu, and disable the Hot Standby checkbox. When the element is next power cycled, it will start up in 1+0 configuration. This can be verified with the Element ID dialog.

6.1.5

Reconfiguring a 1+0 IDU for


use in Hot StandBy Configuration
If the IDU used in a 1+0 is to be prepared for an IDU in a HSB system, it is
very important to do the following procedure :
1.Connect the HSB cable between the IDUs and the switch
2.Power up the HSB IDU
3.Power up the IDU A and IDU B
The IDUs will now be automatically reconfigured as IDUs used in a HSB
system.
WARNING!
If the Y-cable connectors marked with IDU A and IDU B are
swapped, the IDUs must always be rebooted after this operation.

278

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration

SECTION VIII
CityLink Fast Ethernet
Configuration

B4008 Rev. M

279

CityLink

Hyperterminal & Telnet


1.0

Hyperterminal & Telnet Commands


First time configuration with hyper-terminal to IDU's LCTport.
Settings on com port; 9600, 8, 1, none.
Terminal emulation; VT100.
Normal operation via IP.
Telnet session to IP-address on management port or one of the four
ethernet ports.

Figure VIII-1

Starting up and logging in

Login as admin with the password; adminpasswd

Note!
NEW-NMS' security system has initially one user account:
User ID:
admin
Password:
adminpasswd
It is strongly recommended to change this password!

280

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration

2.0

How to get this link alive


Where to start
Status?
Do we want a IP connection to the IDU? If you have NEW-NMS, then
the answer is yes.
Enable IP one of the four traffic ports and do all settings from
NEW-NMS.

2.1

How to get this link alive, parameters


Enable IP as described in Chapter 4.8.1 (this Section). Enable IP on
one of the four traffic ports and do settings from NEW-NMS.
Frequency on both elements must match (Tx to Rx).
Maximum output power.
Tune antennas for maximum Rx-levels.
Verify that transmission is OK over the hop.
Enable and test on a 2Mb/s or connect with computers on the LAN.

LAN 1

M o d u le

CityLink IDU

2 (1 .5 ) M b /s c irc u it 1 - 4

Ethernet
Fast
Extension
EBoard
th e rn e t
T rib u ta ry
(EEB)

CityLink IDU

2 (1 .5 ) M b /s c ircu it 1 - 4

Ethernet
F a st
Extension
EBoard
th e rn e t
T rib
u ta ry
(EEB)

LAN 1

M o d u le

LAN 2

LAN 2

LAN 3

LAN 3

LAN 4

Figure VIII-2

2.2

LAN 4

Radio Connection

Testing
How to verify transmission quality and capacity ?
One way to do this is to set up two computers and do a file transfer
(FTP) between them over the hop.
One PC working as FTP-server and one as FTP-client, check the
time for transfer of the file and calculate throughput.
Do not have any HUBs connected during this test.
Stability of the equipment and hop will be easiest monitored on
BER test with pattern-generator on a 2Mb/s.

B4008 Rev. M

281

CityLink

3.0

Top Level Commands


After logon you should have this text on your screen;
Welcome to CityLink.
Copyright (c) Nera ASA.
CityLink>
Then type help and press enter:
Welcome to CityLink.
Copyright (c) Nera ASA.
CityLink> help
Help:
The following commands are available:
Command
alarms
cls
coldstart
enter
env
exit
gettime
help
list
ping
quit
reboot
settime
tracert

Function
lists alarms
clear screen
shutdown the system and make a cold start of the system
enter submenu
list environment variables
exit submenu
display system timezone, time and date
get help on commands
list available commands
ping the specified host
quit shell
shutdown the system and reboot
set system timezone, time and date
trace route to target

Use "help <command>" to get help on specific command.


Example for usage of "Help":
CityLink> help gettime
gettime: display system timezone, time and date
Usage: gettime
CityLink>
282

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


3.1

Top Level Commands, Example


CityLink (radio)> alarms

B4008 Rev. M

Active alarms:
TIME

ID

NAME

CLASS

STATE

Modem.
2001.11.19 11.04.50
2001.11.19 11.04.50
2001.11.19 11.04.50

1104
1103
1102

E-WARNING
LBER
HBER

WARNING
MINOR
MAJOR

Raised
Raised
Raised

Baseband
2001.11.19.11.04.50
2001.11.19.11.04.50
2001.11.19.11.04.50

32808
32809
32811

LOS_RR
LOF_RR
MS-AIS_INSERT_RR

MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR

Raised
Raised
Raised

EEB
2001.11.19.11.04.50
2001.11.19.11.04.50
2001.11.19.11.04.50

32785
32786
32787

ETHERNET_PORT_2
ETHERNET_PORT_3
ETHERNET_PORT_4

INFO
INFO
INFO

Raised
Raised
Raised

PerfManager
2001.11.19.11.15.01
2001.11.20.00.00.01

3000
3003

G826-15MIN-B1
G826-24HOUR-B1

WARNING
WARNING

Raised
Raised

CLIServer
2001.11.20.14.35.20

32782

CONSOLE_USER_LOGGED_IN INFO

Raised

283

CityLink

4.0

Submenu Commands
The command structure is top level commands and submenu commands.
Top level commands are also available at submenu levels.
The following submenus are available by typing enter and then submenu:

Submenu commands:
Submenu Function

Security
Level
eeb
monitor and control of EEB
passive
baseband perform baseband module commands
passive
modem
perform modem module commands
passive
radio
monitor and control of ODU
passive
su
monitor and control of SU
passive
security
perform security administration
passive
perform
monitor and control of Performance data
passive
config
Lists and modifies configuration settings
passive
test
perform test function commands
passive
fault
Query and manipulate alarms and alarm settings active
q1module Lists and modifies q1 and nnp protocol settings master

4.1

EEB Submenu
Configuration of Ethernet module

Enable LAN ports

Select the important LAN port

Enable 2Mbit/s ports

EEB submenu commands:


Command
autopartition
eebstatus
get2mbport
getethmode
gettribmode
gettribport
getethport
getflowctrl
listportmib
selectpriport
set2mbport

284

Function
enable / disable autopartition
show GT-48350 link/partition status
get 2MBit E1/T1 port state (from SW Version R1C0
this command has been replaced by gettribport)
get Ethernet ports speed and duplex mode
get tributary E1/T1 ports mode
get tributary E1/T1 port state
get Ethernet port state
get flow control for Ethernet port
list the MIB-statistics of a port
select priority Ethernet port
set 2MBit E1/T1 port state (from SW Version R1C0
this command has been replaced by settribport)

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


setethmode
settribmode
settribport
setethport

set Ethernet port speed and duplex mode


set tributary E1/T1 ports mode
set tributary E1/T1 port state
set Ethernet port state

If Flow control is set this will cause a feedback to the sender if the port
have to much to do. In this case you will avoid lost or dumped packages and
you may see an improvement of the throughput if sender support flow
control!

4.2

Baseband Submenu
Configuration of IDU

Enable 2Mbit/s Wayside

Enable 64kbit/s channels

Baseband submenu commands:


Command
get64kg703
get64kv11
getlaser
getwayside
resetbaseband
set64kg703
set64kv11
setlaser
setwayside
startlaser

B4008 Rev. M

Function
get g703 enable/disable
get v11 enable/disable
get current laser state
get wayside enable/disable
reset eeb module
set g703 enable/disable
set v11 enable/disable
sets the laser state
set wayside enable/disable
starts the laser

285

CityLink
4.3

Modem Submenu (part of IDU)


validberlevels
BER = Bit Error Ratio, Number of errored bits divided on total number
of bits.
High BER = 1x10-3
Low BER = 1x10-6
Early Warning (BER) = 1x10-9

Modem submenu commands


Command
getberlevels
getfirindex
getserfindex
resetmodem
setberlevels
setfirindex
setserfindex
tempcomp
validberlevels

Function
get HBER, LBER and ER levels
get current fir tap index
get current serf set index
reset modem
set HBER, LBER and EW levels
set current fir tap index
set current serf set index
get temperature compensation data
show valid HBER, LBER and ER levels

Settings of FIR and SERF index are set from factory! Do not change them!
Contact Nera to get FIR and SERF index if necessary.
Remember to use NEW-NMS or NEW-Configurator when changing
frequency plan used on the system, because then these setting will be
correct.

286

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


4.4

Radio Submenu (part of ODU)


Configuration of ODU
Set frequency, normally done during installation. However, this will be
necessary to set for spare parts.

Radio submenu commands:


Command

Function

Usage

Security
Level
master

downloadodusw transfer ODU SW No parameters


from IDU to ODU
drotuning
get/set ODU DRO drotuning [disable | tx | rx]
master
tuning mode/status
getatpc
get AutomaticNo parameters
passive
PowerControl settings
getfrequency get tx and
No parameters
passive
rx frequency
getmutestate get radio mute state No parameters
passive
getrfpower
get rf output
No parameters
passive
and input power
getrfwarning get RfInputLevel- No parameters
passive
Warning up and
down
radiostatus
display all
No parameters
passive
radio settings
reloadfreq
transfer current
No parameters
master
frequency settings
to ODU
setatpc
set Automaticsetatpc <state | rxref | almoutlevel | almdelay> master
PowerControl
state: state <enable | disable>
functions
rxref: rxref <level in dBm>
almoutlevel: almoutlevel <level in dBm>
almdelay: almdelay <delay in seconds>
setfrequency set tx and
setfrequency <txfreq> <rxfreq>
master
rx frequency
setmutestate set radio mute state setmutestate < on | off>
master
setrfpower
set rf output power setrfpower <OutputPower in dBm> master
setrfwarning set RfInputLevel- inputwarning <WarningLevelUp>
master
Warning up and
<WarningLevelDown>
down

B4008 Rev. M

287

CityLink
4.4.1

Radio Status, Example


CityLink (radio)> radiostatus
Radio Configuration
Tx Frequency
Rx Frequency
Last FrqShift
Tx Frequency Min
Tx Frequency Max
Rx Frequency Min
Rx Frequency Max
Duplex Distance
Rf Output Power
Rf Output Power Max
Rf Output Power Min
Rf Input Warning Low
Rf Input Warning Up
ATPC state
ATPC Rx Ref Level
ATPC alm Out Level
ATPC alarm Delay

4.4.2

= 23198000 kHz
= 22190000 kHz
= Ok
= 23086000 kHz
= 23534000 kHz
= 22078000 kHz
= 22526000 kHz
= 1008000 kHz
= 15 dBm
= 18 dBm
= 8 dBm
= -60 dBm
= -35 dBm
=0
= -10 dBm
= 15 dBm
= 12 sec.

ODU:RF input
ODU:RF output
ODU:+48V
Radio Muted
Loop status
Loop capability
Transceiver S/N
Radio Type
Transceiver Type
Boot Code Version
App. Code Version
App. Code Date

= -113.00 dBm
= 14.00 dBm
= 48.00 V
=0
=0
=3
= 96
=1
= 10
= 1A0
= 4D2
=2001-12-0417:04:55

Radio Alarms.
Alarm : 1502 LOS_RF_INPUT
Alarm : 1504 RF_INPUT_WARNING

Radio Commands, Example of Error Message


CityLink (radio)> setfrequency 22190000 23198000
Frequency out of range!
TxFrequency: 23198000 kHz
RxFrequency: 22190000 kHz
TxFreq.Min : 23086000 kHz
TxFreq.Max : 23534000 kHz
RxFreq.Min : 22078000 kHz
RxFreq.Max : 22526000 kHz
DuplexDistance: 1008000 kHz
CityLink (radio)> setfrequency 23198000 22190000

288

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


4.5

SU Submenu (part of IDU)


Important issues for maintenance and troubleshooting could be to investigate RF-input level and DC-level in ODU.

SU submenu commands:
Command
getanaloge
getauxinput
getauxoutput
getfan
setauxinput
setauxoutput

4.6

Function
list analogue sensor measurements
list aux port inputs signals and configuartion
list aux port outputs signals and configuration
get fan status
configure aux port inputs signals
configure aux port outputs signals

Security Submenu
It is important to limit the valid range of IP-addresses to reduce possibility
of hacking. It is also recommended to customize the SNMP password
(community strings), also in NEW-NMS.

Security submenu commands:


Command
adduser
changename
changepwd
changesnmppwd
deleteuser
getiprange
getlog
getsnmppwd
getuser
resetlog
resetsecurity
setiprange
setusername
setuserpwd
who

B4008 Rev. M

Function
make a new user account
change current user description name
change current user password
change SNMP password (community string)
delete user account
list secure IP ranges
list security log
list SNMP password (community strings)
list users
resetlog deletes all entries in security log
reset security to factory settings
set secure IP range
set User description name
set User password
list users logged on

289

CityLink
4.7

Performance Submenu
The Performance submenu shows the quality on your received signal from
opposite Citylink.

Perform submenu commands:


Command
getfec
getg826
getpulses
getthreshold
performstatus
resetfec
resetg826
resetpulses
setthreshold

4.8

Function
list FEC counter
list G.826 performance values
list error pulses
list G.826 Thresholds
list all performance parameters available
reset FEC counter
reset G.826 performance values
reset error pulses
set G.826 Thresholds

Configuration Submenu
Configuration of the CL Element
Set system type.
Set section and station address, name etc...
Important to execute command "setinterface" in order to enable
management via IP.

Config submenu commands:


Command
addroute
authenticate
deleteroute
eebni
getsysmode
inventory
listnetconfig
listroute
listsysconfig
setantennatype
setgateway
setinterface
setsectionaddr
setstationaddr
setstationname
setsysconfig
setsysmode
290

Function
Adds routes to the routing table
Authenticates access keys to enable licensed functionallity
Deletes routes from the routing table
Sets or gets state on EEB network interface
Gets the system operation mode
Prints inventory data
Lists the network configuration
Lists the routing table
Lists current system configuration
Sets the antennatype
Sets the default gateway
Sets the IP address and netmask of an interface
Sets the section address
Sets the station address
Sets the station name
Sets system configuration
Sets the system operation mode
B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


snmpagent
stationinfo
updatesw

4.8.1

Enables or disables the SNMP agent


Lists Station/Section info
Updates the system software

Management Settings
CityLink (config)> setinterface help
Usage: setinterface <if#> < [<ipaddress> <netrmask>] | [<disable>]>
if#
: Interface no (1-5)
ipaddress : IP Address
netmask
: Subnet Mask
disable
: Disable Interface if#
CityLink (config)> setinterface 02 192.168.1.1 255.255.248.0
CityLink (config)> setgateway 192.168.7.15
CityLink (config)> listnetconfig
Network interfaces.
# Address
Netmask
Description
01 192.168.0.32.1 255.255.255.255 Management port

02 192.168.1.1
03 Disabled
04 Disabled
05 Disabled

255.255.248.0

EEB interface 1
EEB interface 2
EEB interface 3
EEB interface 4

Default gateway : 192.168.7.15

4.9

Test & Fault Submenu


Test submenu commands:
Command
getloop
setloop

Function
get current looping state
toggle looping state on/off

Fault submenu commands:


Command
alarmlog
clearalarm
maskalarm
raisealarm
unmaskalarm
B4008 Rev. M

Function
lists alarmlog entries
clears an alarm
masks an alarm
raises an alarm
unmasks an alarm
291

CityLink
4.10

Q1module Submenu
Q1module submenu commands:
Command
listinterface
listroutes
setaddress

292

Function
List the nnp interfaces
Lists the nnp routing table
Set the Q1 address of the element

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration

5.0

Software Upgrade Procedure for


the CityLink Fast Ethernet Device
1. Download software file to IDU via ftp (1). Note: the filename must be
in 8.3 (xxxxxxxx.eee) format. See Chapter 5.1 (this Section)
2. Log in on console or telnet session to the IDU and in the config
submenu issue the command updatesw [filename], where [filename]
is substituted for the name given to the file in step 1.
3. After the file is loaded to flash, reboot the IDU.

Figure VIII-3

B4008 Rev. M

293

CityLink
5.1

How to download a file to the IDU:


[host] : is either the host name for your IDU or the IP address in
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format.

5.1.1

Using the Console FTP Client


In a dos prompt go to the folder where your file is stored. Issue the
command ftp [host] and log in with your administrator password. On the
ftp client prompt issue the following commands:
bin to enable binary transfers.
hash to toggle printing `#' for each buffer transferred
put [filename] to transfer the file.
bye or quit to exit the ftp client.

Figure VIII-4

294

Downloading using the Console FTP Client

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


5.1.2

Using the Internet Explorer


(This requires downloading the browsing enhancements from Microsoft)
Go to the URL ftp://[host] and log in with your administrator password.
Drag the software file from a local folder to the Internet explorer window.
Close Internet explorer to terminate the connection

Figure VIII-5

B4008 Rev. M

Downloading using the Internet Explorer

295

CityLink
5.2

How to download a file to the ODU


1. Download ODU software file to IDU via ftp. Ref. 5.1 above.
2. Log in on console or telnet session to the IDU and in the radio submenu
issue the command downloadodusw.
3. After the file is downloaded to ODU, ODU is automatically rebooted.

Figure VIII-6

296

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration

NEW Network Management System


The management and supervision of CityLink Fast Ethernet may be
performed in various ways depending on the actual application.
NERAs NEW-NMS can work as an SNMP-manager and control and
supervise the radio-relay (described in the follwing chapters).
The CityLink Fast Ethernet may be treated as just another LAN device
and controlled and supervised via the built in SNMP agent (described
directly after the NEW-chapters).
Interfaces: 10Base-T LAN port or one of the 4 Ethernet ports.

6.0

Start NEW-NMS & Connect


First set master as community name.The SNMP Settings configuration
sheet can be opened from the Configuration menu. Use same community name as in Chapter 4.6 (this Section) Security Submenu.

Figure VIII-7

Setting Community Name in SNMP Settings

Add IP with SNMP checked or specify Search area and do a discover. For
details regarding adding elements and discover; see the NEW-NMS
manual (B1091).

B4008 Rev. M

297

CityLink
Fields:

Description:

Get:

The community string used during discovery of SNMP


elements NOT defined in any search area.
Set:
Default Set community string for elements NOT defined
in any search area.
SNMP:
The UDP port used as destination port for discovery of
SNMP elements.
Trap:
UDP port used by NEW-NMS for receiving Traps.
Start Address: Starting IP address of the range to be searched. Format of
the address must be xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
Stop Address: Stop IP address of the range to be searched. Stop address
must be equal or greater than start address. Format of the
address must be xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.

Add an entry to the search area:


1.Press the Add button, an entry is added to the list. By default start address
= 0.0.0.0, stop address = 0.0.0.0, read community = public, and
write community = private.
2.To change the default values dobbel click the entry in question and enter
the wanted value.
3.To save your settings press OK.

Remove an entry from the search area:


1.Select the entry from the list.
2.Press the Remove button.
3.To save your settings press OK.

298

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration

Figure VIII-8 Adding IP Address

B4008 Rev. M

299

CityLink

7.0

Network Element Configuration


Configuration of Network Elements is achieved using a set of propertysheets. The property-sheets are modeless, so configuration of several
different modules can be displayed simultaneously.
To open the configuration property sheets:
Select the object you want to view or change either from the Explorer View
or a Map View. Select a Configuration command either from the context
Edit
sensitive menu (right mouse-button) or from the Configuration
menu.
The property-sheets are divided into two categories by means of functionality:

Figure VIII-9

Buttons on Configuration property sheets with


multiple settings

Configuration Property sheets with Multiple Settings:


The program retrieves the current settings from the Network Element
(NE) when the property-sheet is opened. No set-messages is sent to the
element and no data is modified in programs data structure before the user
presses one of the property-sheet buttons:

Buttons:
Set:
Get:
Close:
Help:

Applies the current settings in the Network Element (NE).


Retrieves the current settings of the Network Element (NE).
Closes the property-sheet without saving or setting any data.
Displays help for the active property-page.

To change the settings:


1 First, get the current settings from the NE by pressing Get. (The
settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the propertysheet is opened).
2 Alter the settings you want to change.
3 Press Set to send the changes to the NE.

300

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


Configuration Property sheets with Single Interactive Settings:
The program retrieves the current NE settings when the property-sheet is
opened. Has no Get or Set buttons; All functional buttons are placed in the
property-pages. A message is sent to the Network Element immediately
when a control is changed or a button is pressed.
Property-sheet buttons:

Figure VIII-10

Buttons on Configuration property sheets with


single active settings

Buttons:
Close: Closes the property-sheet.
Help: Displays help for the active property-page.
All property-pages have an information field at the bottom reflecting the
current status of the data shown in the property-page and the date and time
the property sheet data was retrieved from the Network Element.

Figure VIII-11

B4008 Rev. M

Configuration property sheet information field

301

CityLink

8.0
8.1

Element Node
Element Id
The CityLink Element Id property sheet shows main information about the
Network Element like name, type, serial number and different addresses.
The fields with white background can be altered by users with proper user
privileges The gray fields are non-editable.
The Element Id configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Element ID from the Configuration menu.

Figure VIII-12

Element ID Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Description

Serial Number:
NE Type:
Name:
Section Address:
NE Address:

The serial number of the NE. (Not editable)


The type of NE. (Not editable)
The name of the NE. (max. 32 characters)
The section address of the NE.
The NE address. Used to identify NEs within a
section.
The Media Access Control address of the NE. (Not
editable)
The Internet Protocol address of the NE.

MAC Address:
IP Address:

302

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


8.2

NE Clock
The NE Clock sheet lets you synchronize the Network Element Date/Time
with the NEW-NMS/PC Date/Time. (The NE Clock is set to the same date/
time as the PC Clock)
The NE Clock configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit NE Clock from the Configuration menu.

Figure VIII-13

Fields:

NE Clock Configuration Sheet

Description:

The Elements Clock: The Date and Time retrieved from the NE.
Difference from
The difference between the PC clock and the
NEW-NMS (your PC): NE Clock

B4008 Rev. M

303

CityLink
8.3

Software Versions
The software versions property sheet displays the software revisions and
status of the SU and the available subunits
The SW Versions configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit SW Versions from the Configuration menu.

Figure VIII-14

SW Versions Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Description:

SW Component:
Bank:
Revision:

Software title
Software location
Sofware revision. The field will display unknown
if the system has this unit present, but is unable to
retrieve the information from it.
Valid: Complete or valid software.

Status:

304

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


8.4

Production Data
The production data property sheet presents details about the HW components within CityLink Fast Ethernet.
The Production Data configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in
the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Production Data from the
Configuration menu.

Figure VIII-15

B4008 Rev. M

Production Data Property Sheet

Fields:

Description:

InventoryName:
InventorySerialNumber:
InventoryVersion:

The name of the HW component.


The serial number of the HW component.
The HW component version.

305

CityLink
8.5

SNMP Agent(s) Settings


The SNMP Agent(s) property sheet shows the current SNMP settings. The
Element SNMP Settings configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view.
The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element
node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit SNMP Settings from
the Configuration menu. All information presented in the configuration
sheet is set locally and not retrieved from the element.
NOTE! In order for NEW-NMS to manage the SNMP element, the SNMP
Agent settings configured locally must match the settings in the NEWNMS. Please see the CityLink Fast Ethernet Agent Configuration.
NEW-NMS is using received traps for keeping an accurate element status.
SNMP Traps are unreliable and no delivery guarantee is given, to overcome this weakness a query for number of traps sent from the SNMP
element must be performed from NEW-NMS at given time intervals. If the
number of traps sent from the element is not equal to the number of traps
received from the element, traps have been lost and alarm synchronization
is needed.

Figure VIII-16

306

Element SNMP Settings Property Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


Columns:

Description:

IP address

The Internet Protocol address of the


NE (not editable).
The community string used when
setting information at the element
(set request).
The community string used when
retrieving information at the element
(get/getNext request).
Element UDP Port for
Get/Getnext/Set
Number of Managers set up to receive
traps from this element.(Not used)

Set Community:

Get Community:

Port:
No. Receivers:

Edit values in the list:

The values of the columns SetCommunity, GetCommunity, Port, and


No Trap receiving Managers can be modified:
1. Double click cell to be edited.
2. Type new value.
3. Click outside cell.
4. To save your settings press Set.

B4008 Rev. M

307

CityLink
8.6

Trap Table
The trap table presents information about the managers currently registered to receive traps.
The Trap Table configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Trap Table from the Configuration menu.

Figure VIII-17

Fields:

Trap Table Configuration Sheet

Description:

IP Address: IP address of the registered SNMP manager


trap Port: Which port is used for sending Traps to managers
Last access: Time the agent was last accessed by the SNMP manager

308

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


8.7

MIB II - System Group


The System Info property page shows some of the MIB-II System Group
attributes. The fields with white background can be altered by users with
proper user privileges. The gray fields are non-editable.

Figure VIII-18

System Info Property Sheet

The MIB II Info configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit MIB II Information from the
Configuration menu.

B4008 Rev. M

309

CityLink
Fields:

Description:

Sys Description: A textual description of the entity. This value should


include the full name and version identification of the
systems hardware type, software operating-system,
and networking software. It is mandatory that this only
contain printable ASCII characters.
Sys OID:
The vendors authoritative identification of the
network management subsystem contained in the
entity. This value is allocated within the SMI.
enterprises subtree (1.3.6.1.4.1) and provides an easy
and unambiguous means for determining what kind of
box is being managed.
Name:
The name of the Network Element.
Location:
The physical location of this node (e.g., telephone
closet, 3rd floor).
Contact:
The textual identification of the contact person for
this managed node, together with information on how
to contact this person.
Sys Uptime:
The time since the network management portion of the
system was last re-initialized.

To change the settings:

In order for the user to change settings the Set Community name must be
configured as described in SNMP Agent(s) settings.
1 First, get the current settings from the NE by pressing Get. (The
settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the propertysheet is opened).
2 Alter the settings you want to change.
3 Press Set to send the changes to the NE.

310

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


8.8

MIB-II SNMP Group


The MIB-II SNMP property page presents the performance of the underlaying SNMP implementation on the managed entity and tracks things such
as the number of SNMP packets sent and received.
A complete description of each field is available by holding the mouse
cursor over wanted item in the dialog and the description found in RFC1213 will be displayed.

Figure VIII-19

Fields:

Description:

OID

Object IDentifier, uniquely defines a managed objects. These


can appear in two forms: numeric (i.e. 1.3.6. 1.2.1.11.1) and
human readable (i.e. iso.org.dod.internet.mgmt.mib2.snmp.snmpInPkts)
NEW-NMS uses human readable form and will display the
above example as snmpInPkts.
Value contained in this OID.

Value

B4008 Rev. M

MIB-II SNMP Property Sheet

311

CityLink
8.9

Looping
The Looping configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit looping from the configuration
menu.
The loop settings are divided into three categories: Main Traffic Loops,
2Mbit/s Wayside traffic looping, and 64kbit/s looping.
Loops can be toggled on/off by pressing the loop-buttons placed on top of
a schematic bitmap. Only one loop can be active at any given time.
The Loop Expire time has to be set to a time later than the current time.
This time must not be more than 30 days from the current time. The loop
will stay active until the Loop Expire Time is exceeded even if the
looping page is closed.
When a loop button is pressed, but no response from the NE is received,
the loop button is colored blue. When a loop is confirmed on, it is colored
red.

312

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


8.9.1

Main Traffic Loops

8.9.1.1

Radio Terminal

Figure VIII-20

Looping Configuration Sheet, Radio Terminal

The different main traffic loops:


All main traffic near end loops are swapped (port 1 port 2, port 3 port
4).
Baseband Loop (far end) - Outgoing line traffic to incoming line traffic.
Baseband Loop (near end) - Incoming line traffic to outgoing line traffic.
IF Loop IDU
IF Loop Transceiver
RF Loop Transceiver
Ethernet Loop near end with swap
E1/T1 loops near end
E1/T1 loops far end
Note! FAR end loop will break management traffic to other side.

B4008 Rev. M

313

CityLink
8.9.1.2

Line Terminal

Figure VIII-21

Looping Configuration Sheet, Line Terminal

The different main traffic loops:


All main traffic near end loops are swapped (port 1 port 2, port 3 port
4).
Ethernet Loop near end with swap
E1/T1 loops near end
E1/T1 loops far end
Line TX SORP LR out to LT in loop end
Line RX SORP LT out to LR in loop near end
Note! FAR end loop will break management traffic to other side.

314

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


8.9.2

Wayside Loops

Figure VIII-22

Looping Configuration Sheet, Wayside Channel Tab

The different 2 Mbit/s Wayside Loops:


Wayside Loop (far end)
Wayside Loop (near end)

B4008 Rev. M

315

CityLink
8.9.3

64 kbit/s Loops

Figure VIII-23

Looping Configuration Sheet, 64kbit/s Tab

The different 64kbit/s loops:


64kbit/s Channel 1 Loop (far end)
64kbit/s Channel 1 Loop (near end)
64kbit/s Channel 2 Loop (far end)
64kbit/s Channel 2 Loop (near end)

316

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration

9.0
9.1

In Door Unit (IDU)


64 kbit/s Channels
Two 64 kbit/s channels can be inserted into the SOH. Each of the 64kbit/s
channel will occupy one byte of the SOH frame. Both channels can be
retrieved from and inserted into the line and radio side independently.
The 64 kbit/s Channels configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting the IDU node in the Explorer view and then
selecting Edit 64 kbit/s Channels from the Configuration menu.

Figure VIII-24
Fields:

Choices:

Description:

Status:

Enabled
Disabled

Enables the 64 kbit/s Channel


Disables the 64 kbit/s Channel
Choose the direction the 64 kbit/s Rx channel
should be extracted from.
64 kbit/s Rx is inserted from line SOH frames
64 kbit/s Rx is inserted from radio SOH frames

Direction:
Line
Radio

9.2

64kbit/s Channels Configuration Sheet

Ethernet Extension Board


The main purpose of the Ethernet Extension Board (EEB) is to convert
Ethernet to/from STM-1 frames. The EEB also multiplexes 4 E1/T1 channels
into the STM-1 frames.
The EEB configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context
menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked
by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the Explorer view and then
selecting Edit Ethernet Extension Board from the Configuration menu

B4008 Rev. M

317

CityLink
9.2.1

Ethernet Ports

Figure VIII-25

Ethernet Ports Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Description:

portEthStatus
portEthFlowCtrl
portEthLinkStatus
portEthPartitionStatus

This entry enables/disables the port.


This entry controls flow control setting.
This entry shows the current link status.
This entry shows the current partiton
status for the port.
portEthLinkSpeed
This entry controls the link speed for the
port.
portEthLinkDuplex
This entry controls the link duplex mode for
the port.
portEthLinkFailureShutdown This entry controls the Link Failure
Shutdown mode for the port.
When enabled port is forced shutdown
due to SDH alarm or remote ETH-port no
Link.
Note: Port is NOT forced shutdown as
described above if IP management is
enabled on port.
318

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


Priority Port
Auto Partition

Designates the prioritized port.(Guaranteed


100Mb operation.)
Auto partition state for the EEB ethernet
ports.

Note :
Ethernet Port fixed speed / duplex mode setting:
1) Set user terminal equipment speed / duplex mode to Auto.
2) On CityLink FastEthernet port sett required link speed.
Note: It is not recommended to use 10Mb Half duplex .

9.2.2

2 Mbit/s Ports
Configuration of tributary E1/T1 ports (2Mbit/s or 1.5Mbit/s).

B4008 Rev. M

Figure VIII-26

2Mbit/s Ports Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Description:

port2MBIndex
port2MBStatus

Tributary E1/T1 port index .


Presents the status of the tributary E1/T1 port.

319

CityLink
9.3

Wayside Channel
A Wayside channel can be inserted in the SOH in either line-direction or
radio-direction. The Wayside channel will occupy 33 bytes (32 bytes data
+ 1 byte alignment information) of the SOH. The Wayside channel use the
Rx and Tx connection at the front panel of the IDU. Rx is received data and
Tx is sent data.
The Wayside configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit Wayside from the Configuration menu.

Figure VIII-27

Fields:
Status:

Wayside Channel Configuration Sheet

Options:

Enabled
Disabled
Direction: Line
Radio

320

Description
Enables the Wayside Channel
Disables the Wayside Channel
Wayside Rx is extracted from line SOH
Rx is extracted from radio SOH.

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


9.4

Auxiliary Output
There are four configurable auxiliary output pins in the ALM/AUX port.
The pins are connected to a relay, which can either be controlled manually,
or triggered automatically on a user selectable alarm.
The Auxiliary Output Configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Auxiliary Output from the
Configuration menu.

Figure VIII-28

B4008 Rev. M

Auxiliary Output Configuration Sheet

321

CityLink
Controls:

Choices:

Description:

Output control radio


buttons:

Manual control Set the usage of the auxiliary


or
output pin. (Disabled if the
Alarm triggered CityLink does not support alarm
triggers.)

Manual Relay status


radio buttons

Closed or open

If the auxiliary output is set to


manual control, these buttons
will be enabled, and can be used
to manually control the state of
the relay.

Equipment tree

Displays and selects the alarms


available for alarm triggers. This
will be disabled if the auxiliary
output is set to manual control.

Alarm trigger list

Displays the alarm triggers


configured. Disabled if the
auxiliary output is set to
manual control.

Add alarm button

Adds the currently selected


alarm in the equipment tree to
the alarm trigger list. If there is
no selection, or if the selected
tree node doesnt correspond
to an alarm, nothing happens.
Disabled if the output is on
manual control.

Remove alarm button

Removes the currently selected alarm from the alarm trigger


list. Disabled if the output is on
manual control.

Alarm triggered relay Closed or Open If the auxiliary output is set to


status radio buttons
alarm triggered control, these
buttons will be enabled, and can
be used to control the state of
the relay when the alarmconditions are raised.
322

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


9.5

BER Thresholds
The Viterbi decoder is a component using a Viterbi low complexity
algorithm for decoding/error correcting the received bit-sequence in the
NE. The viterbi error rate is used as a quality measurement for the radio
hop.
When the Viterbi error rate exceeds certain values, alarms are generated.
The threshold values decides when alarms are generated. The threshold
values can be changed by the user.
Alarm Id
HBER
LBER
EW-BER

Default value
Indicator for BER >1exp-3
Indicator for LBER >1exp-6
Indicator for EW-BER >1exp-10

Alarm severity
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING

Internal proportions: HBER > LBER > EW


The BER Threshold configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Radio node under the IDU node in the
Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting)
the Radio node under the IDU node in the Explorer view and then
selecting Edit BER Threshold from the Configuration menu.

Figure VIII-29

B4008 Rev. M

BER Threshold Configuration Sheet

323

CityLink

324

Fields:

Choices:

Description:

HBER

1.0e - 1.0e

-10

Range.
A Major alarm is generated when the
Viterbi error rate exceeds the High BER
threshold value. AIS is inserted when the
HBER threshold value is exceeded.

LBER

1.0e-3 - 1.0e-11

Range.
A Minor alarm is generated when the
Viterbi error rate exceeds the Low BER
threshold value.

EW

1.0e-3 - 1.0e-12

Range.
A Warning is generated when the
Viterbi error rate exceeds the Error
Warning threshold value.

-3

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


9.6

Laser Control
Available on CityLink Fast Ethernet Line Terminal only.
The optical port may or may not have implemented Automatic Laser
Shutdown (ALS). This is a function designed for eye safety purposes,
according to ITU-T rec. G.958. When implemented, ALS may be enabled
or disabled.
When ALS is not implemented or enabled the laser must be turned on/off
manually.
When ALS is enabled, the laser automatically will restart after a waiting
time period (selectable), when having previously been turned off. (If the
section of operation is not connected or Loss Of Optical Signal from far
end is detected, the laser will again be turned off after 2 sec.) The waiting
period is by default set to 1 minute.
The Laser Control configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Optical Line node under the IDU node in
the Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Optical Line node under the IDU node in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit
Laser Control from the Configuration menu.

Figure VIII-30

B4008 Rev. M

Laser Control Configuration Sheet

325

CityLink
Fields:

Buttons:

Description:

ALS:
Enabled/Disabled
Waiting Time

Toggles ALS On/Off


(1.0 - 5.0 minutes ) Specifies waiting
time before the laser is turned on. If
section of operation is connected and
optical signal from far end is present,
laser will remain on, if not laser will
be turned off after 2 seconds.
Get
Retrieves Laser Control settings
from the NE.
Set
Sends Laser Control settings to the NE.
Restart (2 Seconds) Manually restart the laser for
2 seconds.
Restart (90 Seconds) Manually restart the laser for
90 seconds for testing purposes.
Manual
Control:
On
Off
Status:

326

(ALS disabled or not implemented)


Manually turn the laser on.
Manually turn the laser off.
Shows the status of the Laser Unit.

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration

10.0
10.1

Out Door Unit (ODU)


Antenna Data
This sheet shows some main characteristics of the antenna. Only the
antenna code can be altered. The antenna data are stored in a database file.
The Antenna Data configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Antenna node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Antenna node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Antenna from the Configuration menu.

Figure VIII-31

Antenna Data Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Description:

Antenna code
Gain

The antenna code. Unique code for each antenna type.


The antenna Gain. (dB) Gain is a measurement of the
antennas ability to transform electrical signals to
electromagnetic waves.
The polarization direction of the antenna.
Front/Back Ratio. Ratio between the Gain in forward
direction and Gain in backward direction.
The physical antenna diameter. [ Meter]
The frequency range where the antenna can be
expected to operate successfully.

Polarization
FB
Diameter
Frequency range

B4008 Rev. M

327

CityLink
10.2

Power Settings
ATPC (Automatic Transceiver Power Control) is a function for effectively reducing the interference probability in your network. The output power
from the transceiver is automatic controlled. If the regulation loop for the
ATPC stops functioning, an alarm is generated. This alarm can be delayed.
The output power should be muted when the frequency setting is changed.
The Power Settings configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the ODU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the ODU node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit Power Settings from the Configuration
menu.

Figure VIII-32

328

Power Settings Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


Fields:

B4008 Rev. M

Denomination: Description:

RF-INPUT- dBm
WARNINGhigh

The upper threshold value for when to


generate a RF Input Level Warning
(Alarm nr. 1504).

RF-INPUT- dBm
WARNINGlow

The lower threshold value for when to


generate a RF Input Level Warning
(Alarm nr. 1504).

Manual
dBm
output level

The output power level used when ATPC


not is activated.

Mute output
power

Mutes the output power. No output power


is sent.

Maximum
dBm
output power

Maximum output power for


transmitting.

Manual
Transmit
Output Power
(MTPC)

Disable ATPC.

Automatic
Transmit
Output Power
(ATPC)

Enable ATPC.

Reference
input level

The wanted input level when ATPC is


activated.

dBm

Default
dBm
output level

Set the Power Level to use when an


ATPC alarm occurs.

ATPC alarm seconds


delay

The ATPC alarm can be delayed a


certain number of seconds.

329

CityLink
10.3

Frequency Settings
The Duplex Distance between the Rx and Tx band is fixed. The user can set
the Tx frequency by clicking on the frequency slots. Since the duplex
distance is fixed the Rx frequency will be automatically set. The corresponding Tx and Rx frequency must be set in the opposite NE.
NEW-NMS/-Configurator receives the frequency plan from the NE.
When no NE is connected (off-line) no frequency plan will be shown.
The output power should be muted when the frequency setting is changed.
The Frequency configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the ODU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the ODU node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit Frequency from the Configuration
menu.

Figure VIII-33

330

Frequency Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


Fields:

Denomination: Description:

Frequency plan

Choose the wanted frequency plan.


The frequency plan must.
correspond to your transceiver.
MHz
The used Tx Carrier frequency.
MHz
The used Rx Carrier frequency.
TCM or TCM+RS The coding scheme
The modulation scheme used with
this frequency plan.
STM-1 or STM-0
MHz
The distance between the channels
in this frequency plan.
MHz
The distance between the Tx and
the Rx carrier frequency.
MHz
The distance between the highest
frequency in lower half and the lowest frequency in the upper half of
the frequency plan.
Digital filters in the Modem Board
compensating for RF Filter and
branching characteristics.
MHz
Tx Lower sideband frequency for
this frequency plan.
MHz
Tx Upper sideband frequency for
this frequency plan.
MHz
Rx Lower sideband frequency for
this frequency plan.
MHz
Rx Upper sideband frequency for
this frequency plan.
The result of the last frequency
change operation (unknown, ok,
executing, failed).
When this item is checked the
modem will be reset when applying
selected frequency data. Only to be
used when changing frequency plan.

TX Frequency
RX Frequency
Coding
Modulation
Data rate
Channel spacing
Duplex Distance
Innermost
spacing
Compensation
filter
TX Frequency
Band,Min
TX Frequency
Band,Max
RX Frequency
Band,Min
RX Frequency
Band,Max
Status
Reset Modem

NOTE!
Both the IDU and the ODU must be rebooted after a change of frequency and/
or Reed Solomon code. This is done by disconnecting and reconnecting
power to the IDU.

B4008 Rev. M

331

CityLink

11.0
11.1

Performance
G826 Performance
G.826 is an ITU-T quality recommendation for SDH networks.
The Network Element has several registers for collecting G.826 performance data. The G.826 data is divided into three categories; G.826 15min,
G.826 Day and G.826 Month and they show the B1 measurements for 16
periods of the category. (4 hours of 15min data, 16 days and 16 months are
available in the NE).
The G-826 Performance configuration sheet can be opened from the
Performance context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in
the Explorer view and then selecting Performance Registers from the
Main menu.

Figure VIII-34

332

G-826 Performance Configuration Sheet

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


Fields:

Description:

Time interval
Period

The interval of the measurement (15 min., day, month).


The sequence number of the performance register.
Register 0 is the running measurement, register 1 is the
latest completed measurement.
Severely Errored Seconds. The number of one-second
periods which contains > 30% errored blocks or at least
one Severely Disturbed.
The number of UnAvailable Seconds. A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES
events. These ten seconds are considered to be a part of
the unavailable time. A new period of available time
begins at the onset of ten consecutive non-SES events.
These 10 seconds are considered to be part of available
time.
The number of Background Block Errors. An errored
block not occurring as part of an SES.
Errored Second. The number of one second periods
with one or more errored blocks.
The start time of the measurement period.
Status of the counter.

SES
UAS

BBE
ES
Start Time
Status

B4008 Rev. M

333

CityLink
11.2

Port Performance
The Repeater port information property sheet presents performance and
error statistics for the individual ports on the Network Element. Each
entry in the table contains information for a single port. The data are
gathered from the RFC-2108 MIB.
The Port Performance configuration sheet can be opened from the
Performance context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view.

334

Figure VIII-35

Port Performance Configuration Sheet

Fields :

Description:

Readable frames
Readable octets
Runts
Late events
Autopartition
Total errors

Please
Please
Please
Please
Please
Please

refer
refer
refer
refer
refer
refer

to
to
to
to
to
to

RFC-2108
RFC-2108
RFC-2108
RFC-2108
RFC-2108
RFC-2108

MIB.
MIB.
MIB.
MIB.
MIB.
MIB.

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


11.3

Repeater Performance
The Repeater Information Property sheet presents Ethernet performance.
The figures presented are based on the performance of every port on the
Network Element. Each entry in the table contains information about a
single non-trivial repeater.The data are gathered from the RFC-2108 MIB.
The Repeater Performance configuration sheet can be opened from the
Performance context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view.

B4008 Rev. M

Figure VIII-36

Repeater Performance Configuration Sheet

Fields:

Description:

Tx Collisions
Total Frames
Total errors
Total octets

Please
Please
Please
Please

refer
refer
refer
refer

to
to
to
to

RFC-2108
RFC-2108
RFC-2108
RFC-2108

MIB.
MIB.
MIB.
MIB.

335

CityLink

12.0
12.1

Fault
NE Alarm Log
The NE Alarm Log property sheet displays the settings and content of the
NE alarm log.
The NE Alarm Log configuration sheet can be opened from the context
menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the Explorer
view and then selecting NE Log Manager from the Fault menu.

Figure VIII-37

NE Alarm Log Configuration Sheet

When pressing View in the NE Alarm Log Manager, a dialog box is


displayed prompting for the number of records to retrieve.

336

Figure VIII-38

Number of Records Dialog Box

Controls:
Log full action
Max. number
of events
Number of events

Options:
Description:
Wrap or Halt Actions to take when the log is full.
The number of entries theNE alarm
log can hold.
Current number of log entries.

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration

13.0
13.1

Security
Security Log
CityLink Fast Ethernet has an internal security log that can contain up to
1000 events. To view the local security log, select a CityLink Fast Ethernet
object (in a map or explorer view), and select the NE Security Log
command either from the context menu or from the Security main menu.

Figure VIII-39

B4008 Rev. M

Security Log

Fields:

Description:

Security Log Index


Security log entry text
Security log entry time

The index of the Security log


A descriptive text of the event.
The time of the event.

337

CityLink

SNMP & MIB Description


14.0

General
SNMP = Simple Network Management Protocol
Open internet protocol, requires IP connection.
MIB = Media Information Base
File describing all details about the equipment.
This file must be copied into SNMP-manager

15.0

Supported MIBs
The CityLink Fast Ethernet embedded application supports the following
MIBs
Name
Description
NERA-FAST-ETHERNET-MIB Specific management
of CityLink Fast
Ethernet devices.
NERA-MIB
General management
of Nera radio
equipment.
SNMP-REPEATER-MIB
General management/
monitoring of
repeater units.
RFC1213-MIB (mib2)
General management
of network devices.

Defined in
Nera_Clip.mib

Nera.mib

RFC 2108

RFC 1213

NERA-FAST-ETHERNET-MIB purposes:
To support common management task through SNMP.
To provide network management with an acceptable security level.
To support industry standard MIB definitions where appropriate.
To create a modular MIB design to reflect the modularity of the agent
software.
To facilitate future updates and configuration changes.
To conform to the established conventions of the NERA-MIB MIB.

338

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration

16.0

MIB Overview
The MIB is separated into 8 sub-modules as shown below.

Figure VIII-40

B4008 Rev. M

MIB Overview

339

CityLink
16.1

Unit
This unit contains entries related to overall system properties. This
includes system time, status, transmission settings and management
addressing

Figure VIII-41

340

MIB Sub-modules, Unit

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


16.2

IDU
This module provides configuration and monitoring of IDU hardware
interfaces. This includes the Ethernet ports, 2Mbit/s ports, 64kbit/s ports
and the auxiliary port. The module also contains the global error level
limits for the IDUs data inputs.

Figure VIII-42

B4008 Rev. M

MIB Sub-modules, IDU

341

CityLink
16.3

ODU
This module contains the ODU specific control settings and operational
status. The ODU functional capabilities are obtainable through the capabilities sub module.

Figure VIII-43

342

MIB Sub-modules, ODU

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


16.4

Test Manager
This Module provides means to perform test functions on the equipment.
The design provides an extensible way of generating traffic loops on
various interfaces and test points. It is possible at run time to query for
possible loop settings and perform tests without previous knowledge of
the test loops provided by the equipment.

Figure VIII-44

B4008 Rev. M

MIB Sub-modules, Test Manager

343

CityLink
16.5

Performance Manager
The module provides means of access to traffic performance data. The
current design only supports the G826 B1 measurement type but the
layout of the module makes feasible to extend this in future versions.

Figure VIII-45

344

MIB Sub-modules, Performance Manager

B4008 Rev. M

Fast Ethernet Configuration


16.6

Fault Manager
This module is an extension to the fault management framework defined
by the NERA-MIB specification. It supplies an extension to the previous
fault log which is more configurable than the previous. In addition it
supplies new functionality where a manager can query all supported alarm
types from the equipment and retrieve descriptions and node information
for each one. This will reduce the linking between the management
software and the agent considerable.

Figure VIII-46

B4008 Rev. M

MIB Sub-modules, Fault Manager

345

CityLink
16.7

Analogue Value
This module simply supplies analogue measurements from the agent
system. The module is completely independent of the measurements
presented and is therefore highly extendable

Figure VIII-47

16.8

MIB Sub-modules, Analogue Value

Security Manager
This module implements a simple facility to retrieve security related
information from the system.

Figure VIII-48

346

MIB Sub-modules, Security Manager

B4008 Rev. M

Troubleshooting

SECTION IX
Troubleshooting

B4008 Rev. M

347

CityLink

1.0

General
This Section describes two ways of troubleshooting; by means of LEDS
located at the In Door Unit's front panel and by means of NEW-NMS
Configurator.

2.0
2.1

Description of Alarm LEDs


IDU Alarm LEDs
The functions of the alarm LEDs are as follows:
CRITICAL
Red
Will be activated when one or more
critical alarms are activated
MAJOR
Red
Will be activated when one or more
major alarms are activated
MINOR
Red
Will be activated when one or more
minor alarms are activated
WARNING
Orange Will be activated when one or more
warnings are activated
POWER ON
Green
Will be on when main power is > 39V

2.2

HSB-IDU Alarm LEDs and Switch Indicators


The functions of the alarm LEDs are as follows:
CRITICAL
Red
Will be activated when one or more
critical alarms are activated
MAJOR
Red
Will be activated when one or more
major alarms are activated
MINOR
Red
Will be activated when one or more
minor alarms are activated
WARNING
Orange Will be activated when one or more
warnings are activated
PWR 1
Green
Will be on when main power is > 39V
PWR 2
Green
Will be on when main power is > 39V
The functions of the Switch indicators are as follows:
RX DIRA
Green
Will be on when receiving on A-branch
RX DIRB
Green
Will be on when receiving on B-branch
TX DIRA
Green
Will be on when transmitting on A-branch
TX DIRB
Green
Will be on when transmitting on B-branch

348

B4008 Rev. M

Troubleshooting
2.3

LEDs on Line Interface Plug-in Boards


G.703 Line interface:
Green LED is activated when input signal is present.
Multimode Fiber Line interface:
Green LED is activated when input signal is present.
Singelmode Fiber Line interfaces (1310 Nm and 1550 Nm):
Green LED is activated when input signal is present.
CAT-5 UTP Line interface:
Bicolor LED. Emits red when input signal is present and loss of frame
(LOF) alarm is activated. Emits green when input is normal and LOF is low.

3.0

Troubleshooting by NEW-NMS Configurator

3.1

Introduction
Fault management is the process of locating and correcting network
problems or faults. Fault management is possibly the most important task
in network management. It consists of identifying the occurrence of a
fault, isolating the cause of the fault and correcting it if possible. The fault
management increases the network reliability by giving the network
operator a tool that quickly detects problems and initiates recovery
procedures.
NEW contains functions for acquisition, presentation and storage of
alarms and events from the network to be managed.

3.2

Information Acquisition
In order to detect faults, information must be gathered from the network.
The state of the network is monitored using two different methods.

3.2.1

Polling
The various network elements should be polled on a regular basis, so that
changes in Network Elements (NE) are detected and network connectivity
is checked. Which NE to poll, the polling rate and what to be polled for a
specific NE is user definable.

B4008 Rev. M

349

CityLink
3.2.2

Event Notification
In addition to polling, some NEs have the ability to spontaneously report
events. The NEW will gather this information in addition to polling. This
feature will decrease the managers response time to network events
considerably.

3.3

Alarm Presentation
In all views, where network information is presented, colors are used to
indicate the alarm severity status of the NEs. To easily identify the status
of the NEs, all alarms are classified according to their severity. Each alarm
severity class has a color. In the different views, the NEs change colors
according to the color of their most severe alarm. The alarm classifications are described in the table below.
Severity
Normal

Colour
(default)
Green

Description

No alarms or warning have been reported


from the NE.
Warning
Yellow
Indicates the detection of a potential or
impending service-affecting fault, before any
significant affects have been felt. Action
should be taken to further diagnose and
correct the problem in order to prevent it
from becoming a more serious serviceaffecting fault.
Minor alarm Dark Yellow Indicates the existence of a non-serviceaffecting fault condition and that corrective
action should be taken in order to prevent a
more serious fault.
Major alarm Orange
Signifies that a service-affecting condition
has occurred and urgent corrective action is
required.
Critical alarm Red
The most severe alarm. It signifies that a
service-affecting condition has occurred and
an immediate corrective action is required.
No contact
Blue
Indicates that no contact is achieved with the
NE. The communication settings should be
checked in order to obtain contact with the
element.
Misconfigured Magenta
The NE has not been properly configured.

350

B4008 Rev. M

Troubleshooting
3.4

Visual Alarm Notification


There are four different ways of monitoring alarms in NEW. These methods
are described in the following subchapters. The NEW context sensitive help
system offers a more comprehensive support on all features in the NEW
program.

3.4.1

Alarms on a Tree node/leaf in the Explorer view


The Explorer View is opened by selecting Explore Net from the View Menu.
Figure IX-1 shows an example of the Explorer view.
The Explorer View shows the Network information in a logical manner. Each
NE is divided into two main branches; a Transmission branch and an
Equipment branch. The sub-branches and leaves under the Transmission
branch concern the transmission aspects of the NE. The sub-branches and
leaves under the Equipment branch concern the physical equipment of the
NE.

Figure IX-1 Example of Explorer View


B4008 Rev. M

351

CityLink
The Explorer view use the severity colours to indicate alarm events. The
alarms are presented in a hierarchical manner. The colour of the most
severe alarm is inherited from the leaf where the alarm was identified, to
all branch leaves up to the section symbol. E.g. the section and NE symbols
will always show the alarm colour of the most severe alarm identified in
the sub-branches in the Explorer view.
By pressing the right mouse button on any nodes/leaves in the Explorer
View and selecting Current Alarms from the context menu, a Current
Alarm List (ref. Appendix III) is opened showing all alarms Hierarchical
below the selected leaf.

3.4.2

Alarms on a Node symbol in the Map view


The Map View is opened by selecting Map Navigator from the View
Menu. Follow the instructions in the Help file to create a map. Figure IX2 shows an example of the view.
The Map View shows the Network information in a physical manner. Each
NE is showed as an NE icon. Graphic-files can be added as background
images in the view. NE icons grouped together with bindings form
networks. The NE icons change their severity colours according to the
current most severe alarm of the NE.

Figure IX-2 Example of Map View


By pressing the right mouse button on a NE icon in the Map View and
selecting Alarms from the context menu, a Current Alarm List (ref.
Appendix III) is opened showing all alarms of the NE.

352

B4008 Rev. M

Troubleshooting
3.4.3

Viewing Alarms in the Current Alarms View


The Current Alarm View can be opened by selecting Current Alarms from
the Fault Menu. Figure IX-3 shows an example of the Current Alarms List.
Each alarm is listed as a row in the list as shown in Table IX-1.
The Current Alarms List can also be opened from both the Explorer View
and the Map View by selecting Current Alarms from the right-mousebutton-click context menu. The filter is then automatically set up to show
only the alarms hierarchically below the node/leaf the alarm list was
opened from.

Figure IX-3 Example of Current Alarms


Fields
Severity
Alarm text
Node

Description
The severity of the alarm
A short description of the alarm
The name of the node where the alarm occurred

Table IX-1 Fields in the Current Alarms List


Alarms can also be logged to files. Consult the NEW NMS Manual or the
NEW NMS Help system for further information.

B4008 Rev. M

353

CityLink

4.0

Cable Fault
If a cable fault is indicated, it indicates that the microprocessor communications between the IDU and ODU have failed. The fault is most probably with
the cable connection. It may be open or shorted. Disconnect the cable from
the IDU and leave the ODU connected. Measure the DC cable resistance
between the centre pin and the outer conductor of the N-type connector
terminating the cable by means of a multi-meter.
to a few M
:
If resistance is in the order of some hundreds k
Probably no cable fault.
Replace IDU or ODU, one at the time. If alarm persists, swap the replaced unit
for the original and replace the other unit.
:
If resistance is less than some hundreds k
Probably cable or connector damage. Check the cable and connectors at both
ends for defects or for reasons that would cause the problem. Remeasure
DC resistance, now with both cable ends disconnected. The resistance
should be open circuit and if not replace the entire cable run, terminating
with new N-type connectors.
If resistance is immeasurable (high impedance):
Typically reasons are connectors not terminated correctly or cable cut.
Check the cable and connectors at both ends for defects or for reasons that
would cause the problem. Remeasure DC resistance, with the outer end
still connected to the ODU. If still immeasurable impedance, replace the
entire cable run, terminating with new N-type connectors.

354

B4008 Rev. M

Appendices

SECTION X
Appendices

B4008 Rev. M

355

356

-48VDC

POWER

PWR

64kb/s
V.11

2MHz SYNC
(Later release)

2MHz
Sync.

Phone

CALL

ALM & AUX

COLLECTIVE CALL

IDU - HSB INTFC

Slot for optional


Extension Board

10 BaseT Ethernet
Off the shelf standard
ethernet cable

NI 2

CRITICAL

WARNING

MINOR

MAJOR

LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (RS232)


Connector : D-SUB 9-PIN MALE
Cable : UWMK3123

LCT

NI 1

NETWORK INTERFACE (RS485)


Connector : D-SUB 9-PIN FEMALE
Cable : UWMK3078 , UWMK3079

ALARM & AUXILLARY FUNCTIONS


Connector : D-SUB 25-PIN FEMALE
Cable : UWMK3076

Hot Standby Interconnection


Connector : 68-PIN VHDCI receptacle
Cable : 87W5066-1A

155 Mb/s LINE

Slot for optional Line


Interface Plug-In Board
Ref. Fig. X-6

SERVICE CHANNEL EXTENSION 2


Connector : RJ-45 8-PIN
Cable : 87W5097-1A

SVCE 10BaseT
Ext. 2
LAN

64kb/s 2Mb/s SVCE


G.703 Wayside Ext. 1

64kbit/s SERVICE CHANNEL (V.11)


Connector : RJ45 8-PIN
Cable : UWMK3077

POWER
Connector : PO WER D-SUB 2-PIN
Cable : UWMK5051

ODU INTERFACE
N-TYPE FEMALE

SAFETY
GROUND

PHONE
Connector : RJ-45 8-PIN
Kit : 4CZ5

SERVICE CHANNEL EXTENSION 1


Connector : RJ-45 8-PIN
Cable : 87W5097-1A

Appendix I:

64kbit/s SERVICE CHANNEL (G.703)


Connector : RJ45 8-PIN
Cable : UWMK3077

2Mbit/s WAYSIDE CHANNEL


Connector : RJ45 8-PIN
Cable : 87W5097-2A, 10m patch cable

CityLink

IDU / HSB-IDU Interface Description

Figure X-1 CityLink IDU

B4008 Rev. M

B4008 Rev. M

-48VDC

POWER 2

POWER 1

1
2

PWR

64kb/s
V.11

2MHz SYNC
(Later release)

2MHz
Sync.

Phone

CALL

ALM & AUX

COLLECTIVE CALL

IDU - HSB INTFC

Slot for optional


Extension Board

SERVICE CHANNEL EXTENSION 2


Connector : RJ-45 8-PIN
Cable : 87W5097-1A

10 BaseT Ethernet
Off the shelf standard
ethernet cable

RX DIR.A

TX DIR.B

TX DIR.A

RX DIR.B

WARNING

MINOR

MAJOR

CRITICAL

LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (RS232)


Connector : D-SUB 9-PIN MALE
Cable : UWMK3123

LCT

NI 2

NI 1

NETWORK INTERFACE (RS485)


Connector : D-SUB 9-PIN FEMALE
Cable : UWMK3078 , UWMK3079

ALARM & AUXILLARY FUNCTIONS


Connector : D-SUB 25-PIN FEMALE
Cable : UWMK3076

Hot Standby Interconnection


Connector : 68-PIN VHDCI receptacle
Cable : 87W5066-1A

155 Mb/s LINE

Slot for optional Line


Interface Plug-In Board
Ref. Fig. X-6

PHONE
Connector : RJ-45 8-PIN
Kit : 4CZ5

SERVICE CHANNEL EXTENSION 1


Connector : RJ-45 8-PIN
Cable : 87W5097-1A

SVCE 10BaseT
Ext. 2
LAN

64kb/s 2Mb/s SVCE


G.703 Wayside Ext. 1

64kbit/s SERVICE CHANNEL (V.11)


Connector : RJ45 8-PIN
Cable : UWMK3077

POWER
Connector : POWER D-SUB 2-PIN
Cable : UWMK5051

SAFETY
GROUND

64kbit/s SERVICE CHANNEL (G.703)


Connector : RJ45 8-PIN
Cable : UWMK3077

2Mbit/s WAYSIDE CHANNEL


Connector : RJ45 8-PIN
Cable : 87W5097-2A, 10m patch cable

Appendices

Figure X-2 CityLink HSB-IDU

357

358

-48VDC

POWER

PWR

64kb/s
V.11

2MHz SYNC
(Later release)

64kbit/s SERVICE CHANNEL (V.11)


Connector : RJ45 8-PIN
Cable : UWMK3077

2MHz
Sync.

Phone
SIGNAL

CALL

Not used for CityLink


Fast Ethernet

COLLECTIVE CALL

IDU - HSB INTFC

10Base-T/100Base-TX

Not used for CityLink Fast Ethernet

SERVICE CHANNEL EXTENSION 2

10BaseT Ethernet
Off the shelf standard
ethernet cable

NI 2

NI 1

WARNING

MINOR

MAJOR

CRITICAL

LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (RS232)


Connector : D-SUB 9-PIN MALE
Cable : UWMK3123

Not used for CityLink Fast Ethernet

NETWORK INTERFACE (RS485)

LCT

SIGNAL

ALARM & AUXILLARY FUNCTIONS


Connector : D-SUB 25-PIN FEMALE
Cable : UWMK3076

ALM & AUX

T1/E1

TRIBUTARY T1/E1 INTERFACE (2Mbit/s or 1.5Mbit/s)


Connector : RJ45 8-PIN
Cable : 87W5097-2A, 10m patch cable

10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet
Off the shelf shielded twisted
pair ethernet cable

Hot Standby Interconnection


Not used for CityLink Fast Ethernet

155 Mb/s LINE

Slot for optional Line


Interface Plug-In Board
Ref. Fig. X-6

Not used for CityLink Fast Ethernet

PHONE

Not used for CityLink Fast Ethernet

SERVICE CHANNEL EXTENSION 1

SVCE 10BaseT
Ext. 2
LAN

64kb/s 2Mb/s SVCE


G.703 Wayside Ext. 1

POWER
Connector : PO WER D-SUB 2-PIN
Cable : UWMK5051

ODU INTERFACE
N-TYPE FEMALE

ODU

SAFETY
GROUND

64kbit/s SERVICE CHANNEL (G.703)


Connector : RJ45 8-PIN
Cable : UWMK3077

2Mbit/s WAYSIDE CHANNEL


Connector : RJ45 8-PIN
Cable : 87W5097-2A, 10m patch cable

CityLink

Figure X-3 CityLink Fast Ethernet IDU

B4008 Rev. M

Appendices

G.703
INP OUT

155 Mbit/s STM-1

G.703, 75
Connector : DIN47297, 1.0/2.3mm
Cable : UWMH3080

CAT-5 UTP

INP

155 Mbit/s STM-1


CAT-5, UTP
Connector: RJ45 (FCC-8 compl.), 8-pin Connector
Cable alt.1: 87W5111-CAT5E02S, 2m straight patch cable
Cable alt.2: 87W5111-CAT5E02C, 2m crossed patch cable

MM Fiber

INP

1310 nm MMF
Optical Interface
Connector: MT-RJ
Cable: 87W5078-SCxx/MTRJxx/STxx/FCxx

SM Fiber
OUT INP

INP

1310 nm SMF and 1550 nm SMF


Optical Interface
Connector: LC
Cable: 87W5080-SCxx/LCxx/FCxx

Figure X-4
B4008 Rev. M

Optional Line Interface Plug-in Boards


359

CityLink
Optional Extension Boards
21x2Mbit/s Extension Board:
TRIBUTARY

STM1 Extension Board:


G.703
INP
OUT

Line Extension
STM1 / STS-3 (155Mb/s)

DS3/E3 Extension Board:


SIGNAL
0
1
2
3

Figure X-5

360

DS1-0

DS3/E3-1

OUT

IN

DS3/E3-2

OUT

IN

DS3/E3-3

OUT

IN

Optional Extension Boards Boards

B4008 Rev. M

Appendices
Power Connector

0V STATION GROUND (FEMALE )


IN DOOR UNIT'S
FRONT VIEW

-48VDC (MALE )
Figure X-6 IDU Power Connector Pinout

RJ-45 Connectors
With reference to Figure X-7, several connector pin-outs will be described.
Note that the upper connector pins are reversed with respect to the lower
connector pins, i.e. the lower plug is mirrored. Refer to Figure X-1-3 for
location of 2-by-4 port RJ-45.
IN DOOR UNIT'S
FRONT VIEW
Pin no. 8

Pin no. 1

Pin no. 8

Pin no. 1

Figure X-7 RJ-45 (P5001A-D) connector detail.

B4008 Rev. M

361

CityLink
64kbit/s G.703 Jack, RJ-45 Connector
Pin. no:
1UA
2UA
3UA
4UA
5UA
6UA
7UA
8UA
Table X-1

Function:
TxD- (Neg. Tx. data)
TxD+ (Pos. Tx. data)
TxC+ (Pos. Tx. clock)
TxC- (Neg. Tx. clock)
RxD+ (Pos. Rx. data)
RxD- (Neg. Rx. data)
RxC+ (Pos. Rx. clock)
RxC- (Neg. Rx. clock)
64kbit/s G.703 Jack, 8-PIN Pinout

64kbit/s V.11 Jack, RJ-45 Connector


Pin. no:
1LA
2LA
3LA
4LA
5LA
6LA
7LA
8LA

Function:
TxD- (Neg. Tx. data)
TxD+ (Pos. Tx. data)
TxC- (Neg. Tx. clock)
TxC+ (Pos. Tx. clock)
RxD- (Neg. Rx. data)
RxD+ (Pos. Rx. data)
RxC- (Neg. Rx. clock)
RxC+ (Pos. Rx. clock)

Table X-2 64kbit/s V.11 Jack, 8-PIN Pinout

2Mbit/s Wayside Jack, RJ-45 Connector


Pin. no:
1UB
2UB
3UB
4UB
5UB
6UB
7UB
8UB
Table X-3
362

Function:
IND+ (Pos. Rx. data)
IND- (Neg. Rx. data)
shield
OUTD+ (Pos. Tx. data)
OUTD- (Neg. Tx data)
shield
Not Connected
Not Connected
2Mbit/s Wayside Jack, 8-PIN Pinout
B4008 Rev. M

Appendices
2.048 MHz SYNC Jack, RJ-45 Connector
Pin. no:
1LB
2LB
3LB
4LB
5LB
6LB
7LB
8LB

Function:
INP+ (Pos. Rx. pulse)
INP- (Neg. Rx. pulse)
shield
OUTP+ (Pos. Tx. pulse)
OUTP- (Neg. Tx pulse)
shield
Not Connected
Not Connected

Table X-4 2.048 MHz SYNC Jack, 8-PIN Pinout

Service Channel Extension 1 and 2 Jacks, RJ-45 Connector


Pin. no:
1UC
2UC
3UC
4UC
5UC
6UC
7UC
8UC

Function:
OE1_INP_A
OE1_INP_B
OE1_OUT_A
OE1_OUT_B
CALL_INP
CALL_OUT
CTRL_INP
CTRL_OUT

Table X-5 Service Channel Extension 1 Jack, 8-PIN Pinout


Pin. no:
1LC
2LC
3LC
4LC
5LC
6LC
7LC
8LC

Function:
OE2_INP_A
OE2_INP_B
OE2_OUT_A
OE2_OUT_B
CALL_INP
CALL_OUT
CTRL_INP
CTRL_OUT

Table X-6 Service Channel Extension 2 Jack, 8-PIN Pinout

B4008 Rev. M

363

CityLink
Service Phone Jack, RJ-45 Connector
Pin. no:
1UD
2UD
3UD
4UD
5UD
6UD
7UD
8UD
Table X-7

Function:
Not Connected
Not Connected
TELA
MIC+
MICTELB
Not Connected
LOOP_OE
Service Phone Handset Connector, 8-PIN Pinout

10Base-T (TP-LAN) Jack, RJ-45 Connector (normal)


Pin. no:
1LD
2LD
3LD
4LD
5LD
6LD
7LD
8LD

Function:
TPTX+ (Pos. Tx. data)
TPTX- (NEG. Tx. data)
TPRX+ (Pos. Rx. data)
Not Connected
Not Connected
TPRX- (Neg. Rx. data)
Not Connected
Not Connected

Table X-8 10Base-T, 8-PIN Pinout

10Base-T / 100Base-TX Jack, RJ-45 Connector (uplink)


(Used only in Fast Ethernet configuration)
Pin. no:
1LD
2LD
3LD
4LD
5LD
6LD
7LD
8LD

Function:
TPRX+ (Pos. Rx. data)
TPRX- (NEG. Rx. data)
TPTX+ (Pos. Tx. data)
Not Connected
Not Connected
TPTX- (Neg. Tx. data)
Not Connected
Not Connected

Table X-9 10Base-T / 100Base-TX, 8-PIN Pinout


364

B4008 Rev. M

Appendices
IDU to HSB Interface Connector
The connector is 68 pin VHDCI receptacle. This is a shielded connector
type and the screen is terminated to chassis ground.
PIN
Pos.34
34

PIN
Pos. 11

IN DOOR UNIT'S
FRONT VIEW
Pos.35
35
PIN

Figure X-8

IDU to HSB-IDU Interface Connector

NI1 and NI2, Network Interface Connector Detail


PIN 5

PIN 1
IN DOOR UNIT'S
FRONT VIEW

PIN 9

PIN 6

Figure X-9 NI1 and NI2 D-SUB 9 PIN Pinout


NI1 and NI2 D-SUB
9-PIN FEMALE
1
2
3

Signal Name

Signal Description

RxDRxD+
GND

4
5
6
7
8
9

TxD+
TxDRxCRxC+
TxC+
TxC-

Data Input
Data Input
Signal Ground.
Normally this pin shall
not be connected.
Data Output
Data Output
Clock Input
Clock Input
Clock Output
Clock Output

Table X-10 NI1 and NI2 D-SUB 9-PIN Pinout

B4008 Rev. M

365

CityLink
ALM & AUX Connector Detail
PIN 13

PIN 1
IDU
FRONT
VIEW

PIN 25

PIN 14
Figure X-10 ALM & AUX D-SUB 25-PIN Pinout
ALM & AUX D-SUB
25-PIN FEMALE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Table X-11

Signal Name

Signal Description

USER1A
USER1B
USER2A
USER2B
USER3A
USER3B
USER4A
USER4B
ALM1
AGND
ALM2
ALM3
AGND
AGND
ALM4
AGND
ALM5
AGND
ALM6
ALM7
ALM8
ERRP_V11+
ERRP_V11ERRP_OPEN_COL

Relay output 1A
Relay output 1B
Relay output 2A
Relay output 2B
Relay output 3A
Relay output 3B
Relay output 4A
Relay output 4B
Alarm input 1 (TTL level)
Analog GND*
Alarm input 2 (TTL level)
Alarm input 3 (TTL level)
Analog GND*
Analog GND*
Alarm input 4 (TTL level)
Analog GND*
Alarm input 5 (relay input)
Analog GND*
Alarm input 6 (relay input)
Alarm input 7 (relay input)
Alarm input 8 (relay input)
Error pulses (V.11 output)**
Error pulses (V.11 output)**
Error pulses
open collector output
Error pulses opto
coupler driver output

ERRP_OPTO

ALM & AUX D-SUB 15-PIN Female Pinout

* Analog GND is floating relative scussi GND.


** Selectable from NEW-NMS: B1, B2 or Trellis decoder.
See Section VII Ch.4.4.5.
366

B4008 Rev. M

Appendices
LCT Connector Detail

PIN 1

PIN 5
IDU
FRONT
VIEW

PIN 6

PIN 9

Figure X-11 LCT D-SUB 9 PIN male, Pinout


LCT D-SUB
9-PIN MALE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Table X-12

B4008 Rev. M

Signal Name

Signal Description

NC
RxD
TxD
GND
NC

Not Connected
City Link Data Input
City Link Data Output
Internally connected to pin 6
Signal ground
Internally connected to pin 4
Internally connected to pin 8
Internally connected to pin 7
Not connected

LCT D-SUB 9-PIN Pinout

367

CityLink
21x2Mbit/s Extension board G.703 Connector Details
Figures X-12 and X-13 shows the 4 connectors J1001 to J1004 and their
pinout. For location of the 4 connectors on the IDU; see Figur X-5.
For configuration of 21x 2.048 Mb/s input- and output- signals in connectors and cables , see Table X-13.

J1001

J1002

J1003

J1004

Figure X-12 The 21x2 Mb/s interface connectors from left to right,
IDU front view.
1D

6D

IDU
FRONT
VIEW

1A

6A

Figure X-13 21x2Mbit/s Connector Detail

368

B4008 Rev. M

Appendices
Pin no
in
connec
-tor

Colour
code of
pairs in
cable

Connector J1001

Connector J1002

Connector J1003

Connector J1004

2 Mb/s
Ch. No

Signal

2 Mb/s
Ch. No

Signal

2 Mb/s
Ch. No

Signal

2 Mb/s
Ch. No

Signal

1A
1B
1C
1D

White /
Blue
White /
Orange

Ch.1
Ch.1
Ch.1
Ch.1

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.7
Ch.7
Ch.7
Ch.7

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.13
Ch.13
Ch.13
Ch.13

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.19
Ch.19
Ch.19
Ch.19

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

2A
2B
2C
2D

White /
Green
White /
Brown

Ch.2
Ch.2
Ch.2
Ch.2

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.8
Ch.8
Ch.8
Ch.8

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.14
Ch.14
Ch.14
Ch.14

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.20
Ch.20
Ch.20
Ch.20

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

3A
3B
3C
3D

Red /
Blue
Red /
Orange

Ch.3
Ch.3
Ch.3
Ch.3

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.9
Ch.9
Ch.9
Ch.9

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.15
Ch.15
Ch.15
Ch.15

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.21
Ch.21
Ch.21
Ch.21

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

4A
4B
4C
4D

Red /
Green
Red /
Brown

Ch.4
Ch.4
Ch.4
Ch.4

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.10
Ch.10
Ch.10
Ch.10

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.16
Ch.16
Ch.16
Ch.16

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

5A
5B
5C
5D

Black /
Blue
Black /
Orange

Ch.5
Ch.5
Ch.5
Ch.5

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.11
Ch.11
Ch.11
Ch.11

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.17
Ch.17
Ch.17
Ch.17

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

6A
6B
6C
6D

Black/
Green
Black /
Brown

Ch.6
Ch.6
Ch.6
Ch.6

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.12
Ch.12
Ch.12
Ch.12

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

Ch.18
Ch.18
Ch.18
Ch.18

Input, A
Input, B
Output, A
Output, B

N.c.

N.c.
N.c.
N.c.
N.c.

N.c.
N.c.
N.c.
N.c.

N.c.
N.c.
N.c.

Table X-13 Configuration of 21x 2Mbit/s input- and output- signals in


connectors and cables
Input, A / Output, A, refers to the positive pulse of the signal.
Input, B / Output, B, refers to the negative pulse of the signal.

ADM STM-1 Extension Board Connectors


The type and configuration of connectors used for the 155 Mbit/s customer
line interface on the Extension Board are the same as used for the G.703 CMI
encoded 155 Mb/s customer line interface on the main board in the IDU.

B4008 Rev. M

369

CityLink

Appendix II:

ODU Interface Description

ODU/IDU Interface
N-connector female for: Transmit and Receive IF,
Modem/Transceiver communication and power supply.

Branching / Antenna Interface

370

PBR320 waveguide (38GHz).


PBR220 waveguide (18GHz, 23GHz and 26GHz).
PDR120 waveguide (for 13GHz).
PBR140 waveguide (for 15GHz).
PDR84 waveguide (for 7GHz and 8GHz).
Grounding cable for Branching Unit.

B4008 Rev. M

Appendices

Appendix III:Alarm List & Alarm Description


Alarm Name
BASEBAND
LOS
LOF
MS-AIS
MS-AIS-INS
MS-RDI
2M-WAYSIDE-INP
2M-WAYSIDE-AIS-INP
TRELLIS-PLL
RT-PLL
2M-SYNC
RS-TRACE-MISMATCH
LOC
BASEBAND
DIRECTION RADIO TO LINE
LT-PLL
2M-WAYSIDE-OUTP-AIS
HBER
LBER
EW-BER
RF-ID
MODULATOR
IF-MOD
DEMODULATOR
IF-DEM
OPTICAL INTERFACE
TX-OUT
LASER-OFF
BIAS
TRANSCEIVER
IF-INP
RF-OUT
LOS-RF-INPUT
RF-INPUT-WARNING
LO
UNIT-ALM
ATPC

RF-MUTE
LOOPING-IF-EN
LOOPING-RF-EN

MISSING_LO_SYNCHRONIZATION
LO-TUNING-WARNING
HIGH_TEMP_POWER_TRANSISTOR
RF_RX_LOW
RF_RX_HIGH
NO_CALIBRATION_DATA
HSB_CABLE_BREAK
RF_TX_LOW
RF_TX_HIGH
IF_TX_LOW
IF_TX_HIGH
POWER_15
POWER_NEG15
POWER_6
POWER_48

B4008 Rev. M

Description

Id

Severity

1000

MAJOR

1001
1002

MAJOR
WARNING

1003
1004

MAJOR
WARNING

1005
1006
1007

MINOR
WARNING
CRITICAL

1008
1009

CRITICAL
MINOR

1010
1011

MAJOR
CRITICAL

The Line Transmit 155MHz PLL is out of lock.


AIS is detected on the Wayside traffic output.
Indicator for BER > 1e-3
Indicator for BER > 1e-6
Indicator for BER > 1e-10
Wrong RF-ID received compared to configuration.

1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105

CRITICAL
WARNING
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
MAJOR

Loss of IF 350MHz

1200

CRITICAL

Loss Of Signal:
- Optical or electrical CMI
Loss of Frame
Alarm indication signal detected.
MS termination only
Alarm indication signal is inserted.
Remote defect indicator detected.
MS termination only
2Mbit wayside input is missing.
2Mbit wayside input AIS detected.
Indicates that the Trellis coder is out of lock.(CNF35C
Asic)
The Sorp 38,88 MHz PLL is out of lock.
Selected synchronisation for Line Transmit direction is
missing.
Mismatch between configured string and received string
Loss of clock (SORP)

Loss of INCOMING 140MHz.

1300

CRITICAL

The output power has increased 2dB, or the analoge


measurement of PO_MON is outside predefined limits
The laser is off. It could be manual shutdown
The laser bias is out of limits. Sign of age and degradation

1400

CRITICAL

1401
1402

WARNING
WARNING

No IF into transceiver
The output power is low
No signal into receiver.
The RF level is either above the upward fading threshold
or The RF level is below the down fading threshold.
Local Oscillator is out of lock.
The transceiver is not responding
The regulation loop for the ATPC is not working. Software
generated alarm based on alarm condition on local LOF
on Rx and remote LOF on Rx .
The RF transmitter is muted.
The transceiver looping on IF is enabled
The transceiver on RF is enabled.
(If near-end and far end depends on the node where
alarm is reported)
XPIC LO synch missing
The LO needs to be tuned

1500
1501
1502
1504

CRITICAL
MAJOR
MAJOR
WARNING

1505
1506
1507

MAJOR
MAJOR
MINOR

1508
1509
1510

WARNING
WARNING
WARNING

1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517

CRITICAL
WARNING
WARNING
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR

1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525

MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING

No calibration data
The cable between the ODUs is broken. This will cause
the switch to perform the TX-switching.

371

CityLink
Alarm Name
SYNTH_HEADER
SHF_LO
UHF_TX_LO
UHF_RX_LO
DUPLEX_LO
VHF_LO
TX_SWITCH_MAN
OTHER ALM
MEN-AT-WORK
DROP-IN+48V
BELOW+3.3V
BELOW+5V
BELOW-5V
OVER-CURRENT
WAYSIDE-LOOP FE
WAYSIDE-LOOP NE
PRBS-INSERTED
LOOPING_EN
EVENT-LOG-EXC-LIMIT
DOWNLOAD-IN-PROGRESS
NEED_FREQUENCY
SECURITY-LOG-EXC-LIMIT
64K-LOOPING-1
64K-LOOPING-2
RTC-LOW BATTERY

BELOW+48V
BELOW+11V
BELOW+15V
BELOW-15V
MISSING-CALIBRATION-DATA
FAN-ALARM
DEFAULT_SYSTEM_PARAMETERS
DEFAULT_ANALOGE_PARAMETERS
FAN2-ALARM
HSB-RELAY
IDUA-ACTIVE
IDUB-ACTIVE
HSB-MANUAL
CHANNEL-ACTIVE
NEED-SW
BOOT-MONITOR-IN-USE
BOOT-HW-ERROR-DETECTED
IDU_A_NEEDS_SW
IDU_B_NEEDS_SW
HDLC_LOC_A
HDLC_LOC_B
HDLC_LOC
DROP-IN-48V-A
DROP-IN-48V-B
AUXILIARY ALARMS
EXTERN-ALARM-1

EXTERN-ALARM-2
EXTERN-ALARM-3
EXTERN-ALARM-4

372

Description

Software generated. Operator set men at work before


doing repairs.
The battery supply voltage is dropped below acceptable
limit
Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit
Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit
Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit
Detects short current on ODU cable.
Wayside looping Far End
Wayside looping Near End
PRBS inserted in wayside
Looping enabled
Event log has exceeded the capacity threshold
Download of software is under progress.
A RF unit need to be configured with Tx and Rx
frequency.
Security log has exceeded the capacity threshold
64 kb channel looping Channel1
64 kb channel looping Channel2
The battery that powers the Real Time clock is low

Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit


Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit
Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit
Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit
Modem or transceiver are missing their calibration data in
flash
No system configuration stored in NV config, using default
(stm1,128TCM,28kHz)
No analoge configuration stored in flash, using predefined
defaults.
IDUswitch/Transceiver relay mismatch
Idu A is active in receiving direction
Idu B is active in receiving direction
The iduswitch is operated manually
This ODU is active
Board needs SW
The transceiver is in boot monitor mode
Errors detected by boot code when startup. Reported to
app. code
Reported from the IDU A
Reported from IDU B
The IDU switch has no RX-clock on port A
The IDU switch has no RX-clock on port B
The IDU(either A or B) has no RX-clock
The IDU switch power source 1 has a drop
The IDU switch power source 2 has a drop

Multipurpose port. Configured as


Alarm Output, Alarm Input or Remote Control.
External alarm reported if port configured as alarm input.
Alarm name configurable from management system.
ref External alarm 1
ref External alarm 1
ref External alarm 1

Id
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532

Severity
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
WARNING

2000

WARNING

2001

WARNING

2002
2003
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013

WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
MAJOR
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
MAJOR

2014
2015
2016
2017

2020
2022
2023
2024
2032

WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING/
MINOR on
NL2000
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
MAJOR

2034
2035

WARNING
CRITICAL

2036

MAJOR

2037
2200
2201
2202
2203
2216
2221
2224
2225

WARNING
CRITICAL
INFO
INFO
WARNING
INFO
MAJOR
WARNING
MINOR

2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232

WARNING
WARNING
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR

2500

WARNING

2501
2502
2503

WARNING
WARNING
WARNING

B4008 Rev. M

Appendices
Alarm Name
EXTERN-ALARM-5
EXTERN-ALARM-6
EXTERN-ALARM-7
EXTERN-ALARM-8
OUTPUT-ALARM-1
OUTPUT-ALARM-2
OUTPUT-ALARM-3
OUTPUT-ALARM-4
SEVERITY ALARMS
CRITICAL-ALARM

MAJOR-ALARM

MINOR-ALARM

WARNING-ALARM

PERFORMANCE ALARMS
G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1

G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B2

G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-REI

G826-THRESHOLD-24Hour-B1

G826-THRESHOLD-24HOUR-B2

G826-THRESHOLD-24HOUR-REI

G826-THRESHOLD-MONTH-B1

G826-THRESHOLD-MONTH_B2

G826-THRESHOLD-MONTH-REI

TRESHOLD-15MIN-OOF

TRESHOLD-24HOUR-OOF

TRESHOLD-MONTH-OOF

HIGHER ORDER POH ALARMS


HP-RDI
HP-TIM

B4008 Rev. M

Description
ref External alarm 1
ref External alarm 1
ref External alarm 1
ref External alarm 1
Output alarm reported if auxilary output port configured as
alarm output.
ref Output alarm 1
ref Output alarm 1
ref Output alarm 1
For alarm output function
If any alarms with severity set to critical, this alarm is
raised. This can be combined in the alarm output
expression.
If any alarms with severity set to major, this alarm is
raised. This can be combined in the alarm output
expression.
If any alarms with severity set to minor, this alarm is
raised. This can be combined in the alarm output
expression.
If any alarms with severity set to warning, this alarm is
raised. This can be combined in the alarm output
expression.
All software generated
If the current 15 minute period exceeds the set threshold
for B1, this alarm is set(period 1). After a whole period has
expired without exceeding the alarm threshold(period 2),
the alarm will be cleared when the next period
starts(period 3).
If the current 15 minute period exceeds the set threshold
for B2, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MINB1 for method of clearing. Only for MS termination.
If the current 15 minute period exceeds the set threshold
for REI, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD15MIN-B1 for method of clearing. Only for MS termination.
If the current 24 hour period exceeds the set threshold for
B1, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1
for method of clearing.
If the current 24 hour period exceeds the set threshold for
B2, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1
for method of clearing. Only for MS termination.
If the current 24 hour period exceeds the set threshold for
REI, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MINB1 for method of clearing. Only for MS termination.
If the current month period exceeds the set threshold for
month, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MINB1 for method of clearing.
If the current month period exceeds the set threshold for
month, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MINB1 for method of clearing. Only for MS termination.
If the current month period exceeds the set threshold for
REI, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1
for method of clearing. Only for MS termination.
If the current 15 minute period exceeds the set threshold
for OOF, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD15MIN-B1 for method of clearing.
If the current 24 hour period exceeds the set threshold for
OOF, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MINB1 for method of clearing.
If the current month period exceeds the set threshold for
month, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MINB1 for method of clearing.
Description
Higher order Path Remote Defect Indicator
Higher order Path Trace Identifier Mismatch

Id
2504
2505
2506
2507
2550

Severity
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
INFO

2551
2552
2553

INFO
INFO
INFO

2600

NA

2601

NA

2602

NA

2603

NA

3000

WARNING

3001

WARNING

3002

WARNING

3003

WARNING

3004

WARNING

3005

WARNING

3006

WARNING

3007

WARNING

3008

WARNING

3015

WARNING

3016

WARNING

3017

WARNING

5050
5054

WARNING
MAJOR

373

CityLink
Fast Ethernet Alarms
Alarm Name
FTP_USER_LOGGED_IN
ILLEGAL_DATE_OR_TIME
IDU_TEMPERATURE1_HIGH
IDU_TEMPERATURE2_HIGH
FAN1_MANUAL_STOP
FAN2_MANUAL_STOP
FAN1_NOT_RUNNING
FAN2_NOT_RUNNING
I2C_BUS_FAILURE
BASEBAND_DEVICE_INIT_FAILURE
MODEM_DEVICE_INIT_FAILURE
EEB_DEVICE_INIT_FAILURE
COMMAND_LINE_INIT_FAILURE
CONSOLE_USER_LOGGED_IN
TELNET_USER_LOGGED_IN
ETHERNET_PORT_1
ETHERNET_PORT_2
ETHERNET_PORT_3
ETHERNET_PORT_4
LOS_2MBIT_PORT_1
LOS_2MBIT_PORT_2
LOS_2MBIT_PORT_3
LOS_2MBIT_PORT_4
AIS_INPUT_2MBIT_PORT_1
AIS_INPUT_2MBIT_PORT_2
AIS_INPUT_2MBIT_PORT_3
AIS_INPUT_2MBIT_PORT_4
AIS_OUTPUT_2MBIT_PORT_1
AIS_OUTPUT_2MBIT_PORT_2
AIS_OUTPUT_2MBIT_PORT_3
AIS_OUTPUT_2MBIT_PORT_4
AIS_INSERT_2MBIT_PORT_1_RX
AIS_INSERT_2MBIT_PORT_2_RX
AIS_INSERT_2MBIT_PORT_3_RX
AIS_INSERT_2MBIT_PORT_4_RX
LOC_RT
LOC_RR
LOC_LT
LOC_LR
LOS_RR
LOF_RR
MS-AIS_RR
MS-AIS_INSERT_RR
MS-RDI_RR
LOS_LR
LOF_LR
MS-AIS_LR
MS-AIS_INSERT_LR
MS-RDI_LR
MS-AIS_INSERT_RT
MS-AIS_INSERT_LT
RS-TRACE-MISMATCH_RR
RS-TRACE-MISMATCH_LR
LOOP_MAIN
LOOP_WAYSIDE
LOOP_64K
SW_UPDATE_IN_PROGRESS
FREQUENCY_SHIFT

374

Description
FTP user logged in
Illegal Date or Time
SU Temperature 1 (CPU) exceeded high
limitWARNING
SU Temperature 2 (DC/DC) exceeded high limit
SU Fan 1 is set in manual stop
SU Fan 2 is set in manual stop
SU Fan 1 is not running
SU Fan 2 is not running
SU internal problem at I2C bus
There was a hardware error in the baseband module
during startup of the IDU
There was a hardware error in the modem module
during startup of the IDU
There was a hardware error in the ethernet extension
board module during startup of the IDU
There was a hardware error in the command line
interface module during startup of the IDU
A user is currently using the command-line interface
shell on the IDU via the LCT port
A user is currently using the command-line interface
shell on the IDU via the telnet
EEB Port 1 link lost.
EEB Port 2 link lost.
EEB Port 3 link lost.
EEB Port 4 link lost.
EEB LOS port 1.
EEB LOS port 2.
EEB LOS port 3.
EEB LOS port 4.
EEB AIS input port 1.
EEB AIS input port 2.
EEB AIS input port 3.
EEB AIS input port 4.
EEB AIS output port 1.
EEB AIS output port 2.
EEB AIS output port 3.
EEB AIS output port 4.
EEB AIS insert port 1 input.
EEB AIS insert port 2 input.
EEB AIS insert port 3 input.
EEB AIS insert port 4 input.
Loss of clock in the RT module of the baseband unit
(SORP)
Loss of clock in the RR module of the baseband unit
(SORP)
Loss of clock in the LT module of the baseband unit
(SORP)
Loss of clock in the LR module of the baseband unit
(SORP)
Loss of signal on radio receive (RR)
Loss of frame on radio receive (RR)
Alarm indication signal detected on radio receive (RR)
Alarm indication signal is inserted on radio receive (RR)
Remote defect indicator detected on radio receive (RR)
Loss of signal on line receive (LR): - optical or electrical
CMI.
Loss of frame on line receive (LR)
Alarm indication signal detected on line receive (LR)
Alarm indication signal is inserted on line receive (LR)
Remote defect indicator detected on line receive (LR)
Alarm indication signal is inserted on radio transmit
(RT)
Alarm indication signal is inserted on line transmit (LT)
Mismatch between configured string and received string
(RR)
Mismatch between configured string and received string
(LR)
Main traffic looping is active
Wayside channel looping is active
64 kb/s channel looping is active
A software update is in progress
A frequency shift is in progress

Id
32768
32770
32771

Severity
NORMAL
WARNING

32772
32773
32774
32775
32776
32777
32778

WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
MAJOR
MAJOR
WARNING
MAJOR

32779

MAJOR

32780

MAJOR

32781

WARNING

32782

NORMAL

32783

NORMAL

32784
32785
32786
32787
32788
32789
32790
32791
32792
32793
32794
32795
32796
32797
32798
32799
32800
32801
32802
32803
32804

NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CRITICAL

32805

CRITICAL

32806

CRITICAL

32807

CRITICAL

32808
32809
32810
32811
32812
32813

MAJOR
MAJOR
WARNING
MAJOR
WARNING
MAJOR

32814
32815
32816
32817
32818

MAJOR
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
MAJOR

32819
32820

MAJOR
MAJOR

32821

MAJOR

32822
32823
32824
32825
32826

WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING

B4008 Rev. M

Appendices
Alarm Name
BELOW_11V_ODU
BELOW_3.3V_ODU
BELOW_48V_ODU
BELOW_-15V_ODU
BELOW_15V_ODU
BELOW_5V_ODU
FAN_ODU
FAN2_ODU
RX-LO
TX-LO
RX-LO-TUNING-WARNING
TX-LO-TUNING-WARNING
NEED-RX-DRO-TUNING
NEED-TX-DRO-TUNING
IDU-RESTARTED
NETWORK-INTERFACE-CHANGED
TRIBUTARY ALARMS
AIS-1
AIS-2

M
AIS-84
SIGNAL-LABEL-MISMATCH-1

SIGNAL-LABEL-MISMATCH-2

M
SIGNAL-LABEL-MISMATCH-84
LOS-1
LOS-2

M
LOS-84
LP-RDI-1
LP-RDI-2

WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
MAJOR
MAJOR
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
INFO
INFO

Alarm Indication Signal detected in VC-12 #1.


Ref: AIS-1

4200
4201

WARNING
WARNING

M
Ref: AIS-1
Signal Label Mismatch detected on VC-12 #1. Is set
when the signal label in the LO-POH is set to unequipped.
Ref: SIGNAL-LABEL-MISMATCH-1

M
Ref: SIGNAL-LABEL-MISMATCH-1
Loss Of Signal in VC-12 #1.
Ref: LOS-1

M
M
Ref: LP-RDI-1
Low order Path Remote Failure Indication in VC-12 #1.
Ref: LP-RFI-1

B4008 Rev. M

IDU has been Restarted


Changed has been made to the network interface

Id
32827
32828
32829
32830
32831
32832
32833
32834
32835
32836
32837
32838
32839
32840
32841
32842

Ref: LOS-1
Low order Path Remote Defect Indication in VC-12 #1.
Ref: LP-RDI-1

LP-RDI-84
LP-RFI-1
LP-RFI-2

LP-RFI-84

Description
Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit
Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit
Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit
Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit
Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit
Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit

M
Ref: LP-RFI-1

M
4283
4284

4285

M
4367
4368
4369

M
4451
4452
4453

M
4535
4536
4537

M
4619

Severity
WARNING
WARNING

M
WARNING

WARNING

M
WARNING
MAJOR
MAJOR

M
MAJOR
WARNING
WARNING

M
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING

M
WARNING

375

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi